JP7343211B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine in which symbol combinations are stopped and displayed according to a stopping operation mode.

Conventionally, a gaming machine has been known in which a symbol combination is stopped and displayed according to a stop operation mode, and game media (for example, medals) corresponding to the symbol combination are awarded (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2018-46985

In the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, the expected value of acquisition of gaming media in each game does not change regardless of which stopping operation mode the stopping operation is performed. Therefore, some players may feel that the game lacks fun.

As a configuration for suppressing the above-mentioned inconvenience, a configuration can be considered in which the expected value of acquiring game media is greater when the stop operation is performed in the second order than when the stop operation is performed in the first order. However, in a configuration in which the expected acquisition values are different depending on the order of the stop operations, a new problem may arise in that the fairness of the game may be impaired depending on the difference in the expected acquisition values. In consideration of the above circumstances, it is an object of the present invention to suppress the inconvenience that would impair the fairness of the game in a configuration in which the expected value obtained differs depending on the stop operation order.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, a gaming machine according to the present invention includes a game starting means that allows a game to be started using a prescribed number of game values, and a game starting means that allows the game to proceed in either an advantageous section or a non-advantageous section. A game control means for controlling, a performance control means for controlling each performance according to commands from the game control means, and a plurality of types of symbols can be variably displayed in each game, and symbol combinations as a result of the game can be displayed in a stopped manner. A gaming machine comprising a symbol display means , a stop operation means capable of performing a stop operation in a first order and a second order different from the first order , and an instruction means capable of executing an instruction of an advantageous stop operation order. The game control means includes a winning area determining means that determines one of the plurality of winning areas, and a symbol variation control that stops and displays symbol combinations according to the winning area, the timing of the stopping operation, and the order of the stopping operation. means, a gaming value imparting means for making it possible to impart a number of gaming values corresponding to the symbol combination, a gaming state transition means for shifting to each gaming state including a first gaming state and a second gaming state, and an advantageous section . On the condition that the instruction is executed , the ball dispensing state control means is capable of controlling any one of the ball dispensing states including the ball dispensing state , and in the first gaming state, a comparison is made with the case where the stop operation is performed in the first order. and a penalty control means capable of making it difficult to determine a transition to a ball dispensing state in which an instruction is executed when a stop operation is performed in the second order, and in the first gaming state, a penalty control means is provided at random timing. The expected value of the game value to be acquired when the stop operation is performed in the second order is greater than the specified value when the stop operation is performed in the second order compared to the case where the stop operation is performed in the first order, and the first order is more than a certain value. In the first game state, the difference in expected value obtained between each stop operation order in the first order is less than a predetermined value, and the second order includes a plurality of types of stop operations. Including the operation order, in the first game state, the difference in expected value obtained between each stop operation order in the second order is less than a predetermined value, the specific value is 10 times or more than the predetermined value, and the first game state is The expected acquisition value in each state is less than the specified number regardless of the order of stop operations, and if a specific winning area is won among multiple types of winning areas in the non-advantageous section of the first gaming state, the expected value of each winning state is While the game moves to a relatively advantageous ball-out state, if a specific winning area is won in the non-advantageous section of the second gaming state, it does not shift to the advantageous ball-out state.

According to the present invention, in a configuration in which the expected value obtained is different depending on the stop operation order, the disadvantage that the fairness of the game is impaired can be suppressed.

FIG. 3 is a front view of the gaming machine. It is a diagram showing each symbol arranged on each reel. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a symbol display area. It is a functional block diagram of a gaming machine. It is a conceptual diagram of a winning area lottery table. It is a conceptual diagram of a winning combination determination table. It is a conceptual diagram of the symbol combination table (first half). It is a conceptual diagram of the symbol combination table (second half). FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of an expected acquisition value. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of a configuration that generates a difference value. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining details of a configuration that generates a difference value. It is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the expected acquisition value for each gaming state. It is a figure for explaining the transition of the ball release state. FIG. 3 is a conceptual diagram of an instruction determination table. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining each command transmitted from the main control board. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining each display information. It is a conceptual diagram of an instruction performance determination table. It is a conceptual diagram of each table used in BB lottery. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of main penalty control. It is a conceptual diagram of each table used in stock lottery. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining another specific example of main penalty control. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining still another specific example of main penalty control. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of sub-penalty control. FIG. 7 is a mock diagram of a specific example of each screen when sub-penalty control is executed. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining when to initialize a sub-counter. It is a flowchart of game control processing of the main CPU. It is a flow chart of advantageous section control processing of main CPU. 12 is a flowchart of sub-activation processing of a sub-CPU. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining each control mode of a sub CPU. It is a flowchart of each production processing of sub CPU. It is a figure for explaining a modification. It is a figure for explaining another modification.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, the present invention will be explained in detail with reference to embodiments shown in the drawings.
<Structure of gaming machine>
The structure of the gaming machine 1 in the first embodiment will be explained using FIG. 1. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. A player plays a game on the gaming machine 1 using gaming media (for example, medals or game balls). In this embodiment, a gaming machine 1 (pachislot machine) in which medals are used as gaming media is illustrated. Note that a configuration may be adopted in which electrically stored points are used as the game medium (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2020-116297).

The gaming machine 1 includes a box-shaped cabinet having an opening on the front side (player side) and a front door 3. The cabinet is provided with a hinge mechanism. The front door 3 is pivotally supported by a hinge mechanism so that the opening of the cabinet can be opened and closed.

As shown in FIG. 1, a plurality of (14 in the example of FIG. 1) housing lamps 5 are provided on the peripheral edge side of the front door 3. Each housing lamp 5 is composed of, for example, a light emitting body such as a light emitting diode, and a light-transmitting lens that covers the light emitting body. The housing lamp 5 emits light in a manner corresponding to each performance in the gaming machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 1, the front door 3 is provided with a waist panel 6. On the waist panel 6, the name of the gaming machine 1 and the like are drawn. Furthermore, a saucer unit 7 for storing medals is provided below the waist panel 6. The tray unit 7 is provided so that the player can freely take out the stored medals.

The front door 3 is provided with a medal insertion section 8 having an opening into which medals are inserted, and a medal payout opening 9 through which medals from inside the gaming machine 1 are discharged. When a specified number (3 medals) of medals are inserted from the medal input unit 8, the game can be started. The prescribed number of coins is set according to the state of the game. The medals discharged from the medal payout port 9 are stored in the tray unit 7.

A panel 10 is provided on the center side of the front of the front door 3. A substantially rectangular display window 11 is formed in the center of the panel 10 . From the display window 11, a plurality of reels 12 (12L, 12C, 12R) inside the cabinet can be visually recognized.

Each reel 12 includes a substantially cylindrical drum portion and a band-shaped sheet member attached to the outer peripheral surface of the drum portion. The sheet member of the reel 12 is transparent and has a plurality of types of symbols drawn on it. Each reel 12 is rotatably provided and arranged horizontally adjacent to each other. Specifically, each reel 12 is arranged so that the rotation axis is located on the same straight line. A stepping motor 101 (101L, 101C, 101R) is provided on each of the reels 12 (not shown), and each reel 12 is rotated by each stepping motor 101.

FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the symbols arranged on each reel 12 of this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 2, the outer periphery of each of the plurality of reels 12 is divided into 20 pieces. As shown in FIG. 2, one symbol is drawn on each frame. In this embodiment, the Nth frame from the bottom of the symbol arrangement shown in FIG. 2 (N is an integer from numeric value "0" to numeric value "19") may be described as symbol position "N". As shown in FIG. 2, each reel 12 has a replay symbol, a plum 1 symbol, a plum 2 symbol, a cherry symbol, a bell 1 symbol, a bell 2 symbol, a bell 3 symbol, a bell 4 symbol, a seven symbol, and a BAR symbol. Ru.

Specifically, the replay symbols are symbol positions "0,""4,""6,""10," and "15" on the left reel 12L, and symbol positions "4,""9,""14," and "19" on the middle reel 12C. and are arranged at symbol positions "1", "6", "11", and "16" on the right reel 12R. The plum 1 symbol is located at symbol positions "2", "7", and "17" on the left reel 12L, symbol positions "1", "6", "11", and "16" on the middle reel 12C, and symbol position "2" on the right reel 12R. ”, “7”, “12”, and “17”. The plum 2 symbols are arranged at symbol positions "9" and "14" on the left reel 12L and at symbol positions "0", "5", "10", and "15" on the right reel 12R. The cherry symbols are located at symbol positions "5", "12", and "19" on the left reel 12L, symbol positions "0", "5", "10", and "15" on the middle reel 12C, and symbol position "3" on the right reel 12R. They are arranged as "13" and "18". The Bell 1 symbols are arranged at symbol position "16" on the left reel 12L, symbol position "2" on the middle reel 12C, and symbol position "4" on the right reel 12R. The Bell 2 symbols are arranged at symbol position "1" on the left reel 12L, symbol position "7" on the middle reel 12C, and symbol position "14" on the right reel 12R. The bell 3 symbols are arranged at symbol position "11" on the left reel 12L, symbol position "12" on the middle reel 12C, and symbol position "19" on the right reel 12R. The Bell 4 symbol is arranged at symbol position "17" on the middle reel 12C. The seven symbols are arranged at symbol positions "3" and "8" on the left reel 12L, symbol positions "8" and "18" on the middle reel 12C, and symbol position "8" on the right reel 12R. The BAR symbols are arranged at symbol positions "13" and "18" on the left reel 12L, symbol positions "3" and "13" on the middle reel 12C, and symbol position "9" on the right reel 12R.

In addition, in FIG. 2, each pattern is shown in a color different from the actual color of each pattern. Furthermore, each symbol on each reel 12 is generally distinguishable by the player even when the reel 12 is rotating. Therefore, the player can perform an operation (so-called eye press) to stop the reels 12 at the timing when a specific symbol passes within the display window 11. A symbol arrangement table (not shown) indicating the arrangement of symbols on each reel 12 is stored in the main ROM 302.

Three symbols are stopped and displayed on each reel 12 in the display window 11 of the front door 3 shown in FIG. That is, when all the reels 12 are stopped, a total of nine symbols are stopped and displayed on the display window 11. In this embodiment, the area in which each symbol is displayed is referred to as a "design display area."

FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the symbol display area. As shown in FIG. 3, the symbol display area includes each unit area U (L, C, R). One symbol is displayed in each unit area U. Each unit area U includes each unit area UL where each symbol on the left reel 12L is displayed, each unit area UC where each symbol on the middle reel 12C is displayed, and each unit where each symbol on the right reel 12R is displayed. The area UR is configured to include the area UR. Each unit area UL includes a unit area UL1 located at the upper level, a unit area UL2 located at the middle level, and a unit area UL3 located at the lower level. Furthermore, each unit area UC includes a unit area UC1 located in the upper tier, a unit area UC2 located in the middle tier, and a unit area UC3 located in the lower tier, and each unit area UR includes a unit area UR1 located in the upper tier and a unit area UC3 located in the middle tier. It includes a unit area UR2 located at , and a unit area UR3 located at the lower level.

When a specified number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion section 8, a valid line is set. The effective line is constituted by any one unit area U of the reel 12L, any one unit area U of the reel 12C, and any one unit area U of the reel 12R among each unit area U. It is an area. The effective line in this embodiment is a line that connects the unit area UL2 of the reel 12L, the unit area UC2 of the reel 12C, and the unit area UR2 of the reel 12R.

The combination of symbols as a result of the game is stopped and displayed on the active line. When a predetermined symbol combination is stopped on the active line, a profit is given to the player according to the stopped symbol combination. For example, if a combination of winning symbols is stopped and displayed on the active line, a medal is awarded to the player. Further, when a combination of symbols related to replaying is stopped and displayed on the active line, the player is granted the right to replay. Specifically, if a combination of symbols related to a replay is displayed in the current game, the next game can be started without the need to insert medals. The combination of symbols that can be stopped and displayed on the active line is determined for each game according to the result of an internal lottery process to be described later.

In the present embodiment, a line connecting the upper unit area UL1 of the reel 12L, the upper unit area UC1 of the reel 12C, and the upper unit area UR1 of the reel 12R may be referred to as an "upper line". Similarly, the line connecting the middle unit area UL2 of the reel 12L, the middle unit area UC2 of the reel 12C, and the middle unit area UR2 of the reel 12R (the effective line in this embodiment) may be referred to as the "middle line". be. Further, a line connecting the lower unit area UL3 of the reel 12L, the lower unit area UC3 of the reel 12C, and the lower unit area UR3 of the reel 12R may be referred to as a "lower line". Further, a line connecting the lower unit area UL3 of the reel 12L, the middle unit area UC2 of the reel 12C, and the upper unit area UR1 of the reel 12R may be referred to as an "upward right line". Similarly, a line connecting the upper unit area UL1 of the reel 12L, the middle unit area UC2 of the reel 12C, and the lower unit area UR3 of the reel 12R may be referred to as a "downward right line".

Each reel 12 is also provided with a backlight (not shown) that illuminates the sheet member of the reel 12 from inside. Specifically, each reel 12 includes a backlight that illuminates the unit area U of the upper line of the reel 12, a backlight that illuminates the unit area U of the middle line, and a backlight that illuminates the unit area U of the lower line. provided.

As shown in FIG. 1, the panel 10 includes an input possible indicator lamp 13, a BET lamp 14 (14a, 14b, 14c), a start lamp 15, an instruction indicator 16, a stored coins indicator 17, a replay indicator lamp 18, A plurality of indicators (hereinafter referred to as "indicators ML") including a wait lamp 19 and a stop lamp 20 are provided. Each lamp of the display device ML is controlled by a main CPU 301, which will be described later.

The insertable indicator lamp 13 notifies whether or not it is possible to accept medals from the medal inserter 8. The BET lamp 14 displays the number of bet medals. Further, the BET lamp 14 includes a one lamp 14a, a two lamp 14b, and a three lamp 14c. When one bet medal is set, the one-sheet lamp 14a lights up, and when two bet medals are set, the one-sheet lamp 14a and the two-sheet lamp 14b are lit, and three bet medals are set. Then, the single lamp 14a, double lamp 14b, and triple lamp 14c are turned on. The start lamp 15 informs whether or not it is possible to accept a game start operation (operation of a start lever 24, which will be described later).

The instruction display 16 is controlled by the main CPU 301 and displays instruction information for instructing the operation mode (pressing order) of the stop button 25. As will be described in detail later, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display instruction information in each game during the instruction period. Further, the instruction display 16 displays the number of medals to be awarded to the player when the symbol combination related to the winning combination is displayed on the active line. For example, if the symbol combination "Seven-Cherry-BAR" is stopped and displayed on the active line ("Plum-Plum-Plum" is stopped and displayed on the lower line), 13 medals will be awarded to the player, The instruction display 16 displays the number "9".

The number of medals awarded to a player can be electrically stored (stored) in the gaming machine 1 (main RAM 303, which will be described later). In this embodiment, the number of stored medals is referred to as the "number of credits." The number of credits is added when medals are awarded as a result of a game. Further, the number of credits is added when further medals are inserted from the medal insertion section 8 in a state in which a prescribed number of bet medals have been inserted. The stored number display 17 displays the number of credits. Specifically, the stored number display 17 variably displays a number from "0" to a number "50" which is the upper limit of the number of credits, depending on the number of stored credits.

The replay indicator lamp 18 notifies that the replay is in progress. Specifically, the regame display lamp 18 lights up from the time the symbol combination related to the replay in the current game is stopped and displayed on the active line until the next game ends. By lighting up the replay indicator lamp 18, the player is notified that the next game start operation is possible without using medals. The wait lamp 19 lights up during a wait period from when a game start operation (operation of a start lever 24 described later) is performed until rotation of each reel 12 is started. The wait period is provided to increase the average length of time required for one game to a predetermined value (approximately 4.1 seconds) or more. The stoppage lamp 20 notifies the user that the game is in a stoppage state where the game is not possible.

As shown in FIG. 1, the front door 3 includes a 1BET button 21, a MAX-BET button 22, a settlement button 23, a start lever 24, a plurality of stop buttons 25 (25L, 25C, 25R), a production button 26, and a direction specification button. A plurality of operation sections including buttons 27 are provided. Each operation unit is operated by a player.

The 1BET button 21 is operated when setting one bet medal using stored medals. The MAX-BET button 22 is operated when setting a specified number of bet medals using stored medals. The settlement button 23 is operated when settling the medals and bet medals stored as the number of credits. When the settlement button 23 is operated, medals equal to the total number of credits and bet medals are paid out from the medal payout port 9. In this embodiment, the operation of the MAX-BET button 22 or the 1BET button 21 may be referred to as a BET operation.

The start lever 24 is operated by the player when starting the game. The player can instruct the start of the game by performing a start operation on the start lever 24 in a state where the game can be started. The start lever 24 of this embodiment is tiltable in any direction of 360 degrees from a state substantially perpendicular to the front door 3. Further, the grip portion of the start lever 24 is made of a translucent resin, and has a built-in lamp 42 for lever effect. The lever effect lamp 42 lights up in a predetermined effect.

The stop button 25 is operated by the player to stop the reels 12. Further, the stop button 25 includes a stop button 25L, a stop button 25C, and a stop button 25R. The stop button 25L corresponds to the reel 12L, the stop button 25C corresponds to the reel 12C, and the stop button 25R corresponds to the reel 12R. When the stop button 25 corresponding to the reel 12 is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation") while the reel 12 is rotating, the reel 12 stops (normal stop, pseudo stop).

Hereinafter, in this embodiment, the first stop operation in each game will be referred to as the first stop operation. Similarly, the second stop operation is called a second stop operation, and the third stop operation is called a third stop operation. Furthermore, the control by which the gaming machine 1 (main CPU 301 described later) stops the reels 12 based on the first stop operation is referred to as first stop control. Similarly, the stop control of the reel 12 based on the second stop operation is called second stop control, and the stop control of the reel 12 based on the third stop operation is called third stop control. Further, the symbol position of the reel 12 located on the middle line of the display window 11 at the time when the stop operation is performed is referred to as the stop operation position. The symbol position located on the middle line during the rotation of each reel 12 is stored in the symbol counter, and the symbol position on the symbol counter at the time of the stop operation is acquired as the stop operation position. The symbol counter is provided in the main RAM 303, for example.

When all the reels 12 are stopped, the combination of symbols resulting from the game is displayed on the active line, and the game ends. When the game starts, each reel 12 accelerates to a constant rotation speed. During a period in which each reel 12 is at a constant rotational speed (a period in which the reels 12 are rotating steadily), a stop operation can be performed to stop and display the game result on the active line. On the other hand, during the acceleration period from when each reel 12 starts rotating until it rotates steadily, a stop operation for displaying the game result is not accepted even if the reel 12 is rotating.

The stop button 25 of this embodiment can be controlled into multiple types of display modes. Specifically, each stop button 25 is provided with a light emitting body (for example, an LED) capable of emitting red, blue, and green light. During the period in which the light emitter of the stop button 25 emits red light, the stop button 25 appears to emit red light. Similarly, during a period when the light emitter of the stop button 25 emits blue light, the stop button 25 appears to emit blue light, and during a period when the light emitter of the stop button 25 emits green light, the stop button 25 appears to emit green light. It appears to emit light. The stop button 25 emits green light when a specific setting value (setting value "1") is set among the setting values described below. According to the above configuration, it can be understood from the aspect of the stop button 25 that a specific setting value has been set. Note that the mode of the stop button 25 is not limited to the above example.

The performance button 26 is operated by the player when giving instructions regarding the performance. For example, the player can instruct execution of a specific performance by operating the performance button 26. That is, the particular performance is executed in response to the operation of the performance button 26 (trigger). Note that it is also possible to make the MAX-BET button 22 have the function of the production button 26. According to the above configuration, the effect button 26 is omitted, and the number of parts can be reduced.

In addition, if the performance button 26 is operated during the period from the end of the current game until the bet medals are inserted to start the next game (hereinafter referred to as "non-gaming period"), the menu image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30.

The operation of the effect button 26 is detected by the effect button switch 26SW. For example, when the effect button 26 is not pressed, the effect button switch 26SW outputs an OFF signal. On the other hand, when the production button 26 is pressed, the production button switch 26SW outputs an ON signal. During the non-gaming period, when the performance button switch 26SW changes from the OFF state to the ON state, a menu image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30.

The direction designation button 27 is operated by the player, for example, when a menu image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. The direction designation button 27 includes an upper button, a lower button, a right button, and a left button. For example, by operating the direction designation button 27, a cursor for designating an option displayed on the menu image can be moved. Specifically, when the upper button is operated, the cursor within the menu image moves upward. Similarly, when the down button is operated, the cursor moves downward, when the right button is operated, the cursor moves to the right, and when the left button is operated, the cursor moves to the left.

During the non-gaming period, when the direction designation button 27 is operated, the master volume of the gaming machine 1 is changed. Further, during the non-gaming period, when the direction designation button 27 is operated appropriately, the production mode of the gaming machine 1 can be changed. There are three types of performance modes in this embodiment: enjoy mode, normal mode, and simple mode. In each of the above performance modes, the execution frequency of the performance is different. Specifically, in the enjoyment mode, the performance is most easily performed among the performance modes. Furthermore, in the simple mode, it is the least likely to perform a performance among the performance modes. In the simple mode of this embodiment, no effects other than the BB state winning announcement, which will be described later, are executed.

As shown in FIG. 1, in addition to the above-mentioned display ML (start lamp 15, etc.), the panel 10 of the front door 3 includes a plurality of performance lamps 28 (28a to 28e) and a plurality of stop operation order display lamps 29. (29L, 29C, 29R) are provided. Each lamp of the display ML is controlled by the main CPU 301, whereas each production lamp 28 and each stop operation order display lamp 29 is controlled by a sub CPU 412, which will be described later. Among the plurality of performance lamps 28, the performance lamp 28a and the performance lamp 28b are provided on the left side of the display window 11 when viewed from the front, and the performance lamps 28c to 28e are provided on the right side of the display window 11 when viewed from the front. established in Each performance lamp 28 notifies the current game status and the like.

Each stop operation order display lamp 29 is provided in a region of the panel 10 below the display window 11, and informs the order of operations of each stop button 25. As shown in FIG. 1, a liquid crystal display device 30 for displaying various images is provided above the display window 11 of the front door 3. The liquid crystal display device 30 displays moving images and still images in accordance with the effects executed by the gaming machine 1. Specifically, the liquid crystal display device 30 reports information related to the result of an internal lottery process to be described later, information indicating the state of the balls, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 1, upper lamps 35 (L, R) are provided on the upper end side of the front door 3. The upper lamp 35 includes, for example, a light emitting diode that can emit light in each color (blue, yellow, green, red, etc.) and a lens that covers the light emitting diode. For example, when a winning combination is stopped and displayed on the active line, the upper lamp 35 emits light in a manner (color) corresponding to the winning combination. Further, the upper lamp 35 emits light in a manner corresponding to each performance.

As shown in FIG. 1, the front door 3 is provided with speakers 31 (31L, 31R) and speakers 32 (32L, 32R). The speaker 31 is provided on the lower end side of the front door 3, and includes a speaker 31L attached to the left side and a speaker 31R attached to the right side when viewed from the player side. Further, the speaker 32 is provided on the upper end side of the front door 3, and includes a speaker 32L attached to the left side when viewed from the player side and a speaker 32R attached to the right side. The speakers 31 and 32 output sounds (music, sounds, and sound effects) according to the performance. For example, the speakers 31 and 32 output sounds related to the effects performed on the liquid crystal display device 30, the effect lamp 28, the housing lamp 5, the stop operation order display lamp 29, or the lever effect lamp 42. do. The speakers 31 and 32 are attached to the back surface of the front door 3, and a plurality of sound emitting holes are formed on the surface of the front door 3 at positions corresponding to the speakers 31 and 32, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 1, the front door 3 is provided with a return button 33. The return button 33 is operated to eliminate medal clogging in the medal flow path inside the gaming machine 1. By operating the return button 33, the medals stuck in the medal flow path are discharged from the medal payout port 9.

The front door 3 is provided with a locking device 4 in which a keyhole is formed. The front door 3 is locked by the locking device 4 of the front door 3 engaging with a locking piece (not shown) of the cabinet. As shown in FIG. 1, the keyhole of the locking device 4 is located at the front of the front door 3, into which a key (not shown) for unlocking the front door 3 can be inserted. As will be described later, various operation units (eg, setting change button 37) are provided inside the cabinet. Each operating section inside the cabinet is operated by a person in charge of the key that unlocks the front door 3 (for example, a clerk at the gaming parlor where the gaming machine 1 is installed).

A main control board 300 is provided inside the cabinet. Specifically, the main control board 300 is housed in a transparent board case and attached to the back plate of the cabinet. Various electronic components including a main CPU 301, which will be described later, are mounted on the main control board 300. Further, the main control board 300 is electrically connected to various boards including a reel board 100, a relay board 200, a sub-control board 400, and a power supply board 500, which will be described later, via connectors (not shown). Note that the various substrates described above may be composed of a single substrate or may be composed of a plurality of substrates.

A setting display section 36 and a setting change button 37 are provided inside the cabinet. The setting display section 36 displays setting values of the gaming machine 1. The set value is a numerical value related to the ball payout rate of the gaming machine 1, and in each game, various lottery draws are performed with a probability according to the set value. For example, the set value is set from "1" to "6", and the set value "6" has the highest ball payout rate. In this embodiment, when the setting change key is inserted into the setting change keyhole and rotated, the setting display section 36 displays the setting value.

The setting change button 37 is operated when changing the numerical value on the setting display section 36. The setting display section 36 increments and displays a numerical value by 1 each time the setting change button 37 is operated. When the start lever 24 is operated during the period in which the setting value is displayed on the setting display section 36, the numerical value displayed on the setting display section 36 at the time of the operation is stored as the setting value.

However, in this embodiment, the numbers "0", "1", "2", "4", "5", and "6" are displayed on the setting display section 36. Specifically, when the power is turned on while the setting change key is rotated, the setting change mode is entered. In the setting change mode, if the start lever 24 is operated during the period in which the number "0" is displayed on the setting display section 36, the set value "1" is set. Furthermore, if the start lever 24 is operated during the period in which the number "1" is displayed on the setting display section 36, the set value "2" is set. Further, if the start lever 24 is operated during the period in which the number "2" is displayed on the setting display section 36, the set value "3" is set.

Similarly, if the start lever 24 is operated during a period when the number "4" is displayed on the setting display section 36, the set value "4" is set, and during a period during which the number "5" is displayed on the setting display section 36. When the start lever 24 is operated during the period when the start lever 24 is operated, the set value "5" is set, and when the start lever 24 is operated during the period when the number "6" is displayed on the setting display section 36, the set value "6" is set. be done. Once the set value is set, the setting change mode ends and the game becomes playable.

A sub-control board 400 is provided on the back side of the front door 3. The sub-control board 400 includes various boards including a production control board 410, an image control board 420, and a sound board 430.

A power supply device 510 is provided inside the cabinet. The power supply device 510 includes an AC-DC converter and a DC-DC converter (both not shown), generates a DC voltage from an AC voltage supplied from outside the gaming machine 1, and generates multiple types of DC voltage from the generated DC voltage. Generates DC voltage. For example, the power supply device 510 supplies a 32V DC voltage used to drive a motor and a solenoid, a 12V DC voltage supplied to the liquid crystal display device 30, and a 5V DC voltage supplied to an electronic circuit board (for example, the main control board 300). generates a DC voltage of

The power supply device 510 is provided with a power button 511 and a reset button 512. When the power button 511 is operated to the ON state, power is supplied to the gaming machine 1, and when the power button 511 is operated to the OFF state, the power is cut off. The reset button 512 is operated when resetting the ball dispensing state and the like. Specifically, when the reset button is operated, a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 303, which will be described later, is reset to the initial value.

The main control board 300 is provided with various electronic components. Specifically, various electronic components including a main CPU 301, a main ROM 302, a main RAM 303, a resistor, a capacitor, a connector, a setting display section 36, and a main display 40 are mounted on the main control board 300. The connector is used to electrically connect the main control board 300 and other control devices.

<Game machine circuit>
The structure of the gaming machine 1 has been described above. Below, the functions of each circuit included in the gaming machine 1 will be explained using FIG. 4. As shown in FIG. 4, the gaming machine 1 includes a reel board 100, a relay board 200, a main control board 300, a sub-control board 400, and a power supply board 500.

<Main control board>
As shown in FIG. 4, the main control board 300 includes a main CPU 301, a main ROM 302, a main RAM 303, a random number generator 304, and an I/F (interface) circuit 305. Note that the main CPU 301, main ROM 302, and main RAM 303 may be provided as separate electronic devices, or may be provided as a one-chip microcomputer in which each element is integrally configured.

The main ROM 302 nonvolatilely stores a control program executed by the main CPU 301 and various data (for example, a winning area lottery table). The main RAM 303 stores various data used in each process executed by the main CPU 301.

The main CPU 301 reads a control program stored in the main ROM 302 and performs predetermined processing in accordance with the progress of the game, thereby controlling the sub-control board 400, each reel 12, the hopper 520 that pays out medals, and the display ML. Control various devices including.

A random number generator 304 generates a random number R1 used in an internal lottery process to be described later. The random number generator 304 of this embodiment includes a counter circuit, a sampling circuit, and a pulse generation circuit (all not shown), and generates hardware random numbers. Specifically, the pulse generation circuit outputs a signal to the counter circuit at a predetermined period. The numerical value of the counter circuit is incremented by "1" every time a signal is input from the pulse generating circuit. The sampling circuit stores the numerical value of the counter circuit as a random value R1 when the player performs a game start operation. The random number R1 is generated in the range of numbers "0" to "65535". Note that a software random number may be employed as the random value R1.

In this embodiment, a random number R2 is generated in addition to the random number R1. The random number R2 is a software random number obtained from a register built into the main CPU 301, and is generated in the range of numbers "0" to "255". As will be described later, the random number R2 is used in the spinning performance determination process. In the above-described round performance determination process, the type of round performance (pseudo game) is determined by lottery. In the spinning performance, each reel 12 is controlled in a manner different from that in a normal game. The main CPU 301 also generates a random number R3. The random number R3 is generated in the range of numbers "0" to "255". The random number value R3 is used in a determination condition lottery process, etc., which will be described later.

The I/F circuit 305 inputs signals from each switch SW (eg, start switch 24SW) of various operation units (eg, start lever 24) and signals from each sensor SE (eg, medal sensor 34SE) to the main CPU 301. The signals from each switch SW and each sensor SE are high level or low level signals. In this embodiment, for the sake of explanation, a first level (high level or low level) signal is referred to as an ON signal, and a second level (low level or high level) signal is referred to as an OFF signal. do. Whether the first level, which is the ON signal, is high level or low level is set depending on the type of switch SW or sensor SE. Further, the fact that an ON signal (OFF signal) is output from the switch SW may be described as "the switch SW is in the ON state (OFF state)".

The I/F circuit 305 outputs various signals for driving the display ML, the hopper 520, and each reel 12 to the outside of the main control board 300. Further, the I/F circuit 305 outputs various commands to the sub-control board 400. Note that in order to prevent unauthorized commands from being input to the main control board, commands from the sub-control board 400 are not received by the main control board 300.

A signal from the main control board 300 is input to the reel board 100. The reel board 100 outputs drive pulses to each reel 12 in response to signals from the main control board 300. Each stepping motor 101 of each reel 12 is driven according to a drive pulse from the reel board 100.

The stepping motor 101 includes a plurality of (four) coils. The combination of coils to be excited among the coils is sequentially switched each time a drive pulse is input from the reel board 100, and each reel 12 is rotated by sequentially switching the combination of coils to be excited. Specifically, when the combination of excited coils of the stepping motor 101 is switched once, the reel 12 rotates by a predetermined angle. For example, when a pulse is applied 24 times, the reel 12 rotates by an angle corresponding to one frame (unit area U), and when a pulse is applied 504 times, the reel 12 rotates once. In the above configuration, the shorter the time interval at which drive pulses are applied, the faster the rotational speed of the reel 12 becomes.

ON/OFF signals from the plurality of reel sensors 111 (111L, 111C, 111R) are input to the main control board 300 via the reel board 100. Among the reel sensors 111, the reel sensor 111L corresponds to the reel 12L, the reel sensor 111C corresponds to the reel 12C, and the reel sensor 111R corresponds to the reel 12R. Each reel sensor 111 outputs an ON signal when the rotation angle of the corresponding reel 12 is at the reference position. On the other hand, when the rotation angle of each reel 12 is other than the reference position, each reel sensor 111 outputs an OFF signal. The main CPU 301 of the main control board 300 can determine the rotation angle of each reel 12 from the signals from each reel sensor 111 and the number of times a drive pulse is output to each stepping motor 101.

Relay board 200 relays signals from main control board 300 to display device ML. Display device ML is driven according to a signal output from main control board 300. Further, the relay board 200 relays ON/OFF signals inputted to the main control board 300 from each sensor (such as a start switch 24SW described later) that detects the operation of each operation unit (such as the start lever 24). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the relay board 200 relays ON/OFF signals from the 1BET switch 21SW, MAX-BET switch 22SW, settlement switch 23SW, start switch 24SW, stop switch 25SW, and medal sensor 34SE. do. Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the power supply board 500 relays ON/OFF signals of various sensors or switches including the reset switch 512SE and the payout sensor 112SE.

The 1BET switch 21SW detects the operation of the 1BET button 21 by the player. Further, the ON signal from the 1BET switch 21SW is input to the I/F circuit 305 of the main control board 300 via the relay board 200. When the ON signal from the 1BET switch 21SW is input, the main CPU 301 adds one medal to the bet medals.

The MAX-BET switch 22SW detects the operation of the MAX-BET button 22 by the player. Further, the ON signal from the MAX-BET switch 22SW is input to the I/F circuit 305 of the main control board 300 via the relay board 200. When the ON signal from the MAX-BET switch 22SW is input, the main CPU 301 sets a specified number of medals as bet medals.

The settlement switch 23SW detects the operation of the settlement button 23 by the player. The ON signal from the payment switch 23SW is input to the I/F circuit 305 of the main control board 300 via the relay board 200.

When an ON signal from the payment switch 23SW is input, or when a winning combination of symbols is displayed on the active line, the main CPU 301 outputs a hopper drive signal to the hopper 520. The hopper drive signal is input from the main control board 300 to the hopper 520 via the power supply board 500. The hopper 520 pays out medals when a hopper drive signal is input.

The payout sensor 112SE outputs a payout signal to the main control board 300 every time one medal is paid out from the hopper 520. Specifically, the payout sensor 112SE is provided at a position where medals passing through the ejection slit 521b of the hopper 520 are detected. The payout sensor 112SE outputs a payout signal when detecting a medal. The payout signal is input to the main control board 300 via the power supply board 500. The main CPU 301 can determine the number of medals that have been paid out by counting the number of times that the payout signal has been input.

The power switch 511SW is switched to an ON state or an OFF state by operating the power button 511. When the power switch 511SW is in the ON state, power is supplied from the power supply device 510 to the gaming machine 1, and when the power switch 511SW is in the OFF state, the power from the power supply device 510 to the gaming machine 1 is cut off. The power supply device 510 generates a DC voltage when supplied with power. The DC voltage generated by the power supply device 510 is supplied to various devices including the hopper 520 via the power supply board 500.

Reset switch 512SW is provided in power supply device 510 and outputs a reset signal to main control board 300 when reset button 512 is operated. The reset signal is input to the main control board 300 via the power supply board 500. Upon receiving the reset signal, the main CPU 301 initializes a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 303, for example, canceling the error state. Note that a configuration may be provided in which a plurality of reset switches 512SW (reset buttons 512) are provided. For example, in addition to the reset switch 512SW provided in the power supply device 510, a reset switch may be provided in the locking device 4. In the above configuration, for example, when a key is inserted into the keyhole of the locking device 4 and the key is rotated to the right, the front door 3 is unlocked, and when the key is rotated to the left, a reset signal is output from the reset switch. The output configuration is preferably adopted.

The setting change switch 37SW shown in FIG. 4 detects the operation of the setting change button 37. The ON signal from the setting change switch 37SW is input to the main control board 300. When the ON signal from the setting change switch 37SW is input, the main CPU 301 updates the display on the setting display section 36. In addition, if an ON signal is input from the setting change switch 37SW during a period in which the setting value is not displayed on the setting display section 36, the main CPU 301 causes the storage number display 16 to display the specified accessories ratio (described later). . The medal sensor 34SE detects medals inserted from the medal insertion section 8.

ON/OFF signals from a plurality of stop switches 25SW (25SWL, 25SWC, 25SWR) are input to the main control board 300 via the relay board 200. Among the stop switches 25SW, the stop switch 25SWL corresponds to the stop button 25L, the stop switch 25SWC corresponds to the stop button 25C, and the stop switch 25SWR corresponds to the stop button 25R. The main CPU 301 controls the stop of the reel 12 corresponding to the stop switch 25SW to which the ON signal is input. Specifically, when an ON signal is input from the stop switch 25SWL, the reel 12L is controlled to stop. Similarly, the main CPU 301 controls the reel 12C to stop when the ON signal is input from the stop switch 25SWC, and controls the reel 12R to stop when the ON signal is input from the stop switch 25SWR.

The start switch 24SW detects the operation of the start lever 24 by the player. The ON signal from the start switch 24SW is input to the I/F circuit 305 of the main control board 300 via the relay board 200. For example, the main CPU 301 controls each stepping motor 101 to rotate each reel 12 when an ON signal from the start switch 24SW is input. Further, an ON signal from the setting change switch 37SW is input to the main control board 300.

The start switch 24SW of this embodiment is configured to be able to detect the direction in which the start lever 24 is operated. Specifically, the start switch 24SW can individually detect any one of a push-up operation to push up the start lever 24, a push-down operation to push it down, a right-hand operation to push it to the right, and a left-hand operation to push it to the left, as viewed from the player's side. be. For example, the start switch 24SW is divided into a start switch 24SWU that outputs an ON signal when the start lever 24 is pressed up, a start switch 24SWD that outputs an ON signal when the start lever 24 is pressed down, and a start switch 24SWD that outputs an ON signal when the start lever 24 is pressed down. It is composed of a plurality of sensors including a start switch 24SWR that outputs a signal and a start switch 24SWL that outputs an ON signal when operated on the left side. According to the above configuration, it is possible to make different effects performed depending on, for example, when the start lever 24 is pressed down and when it is pushed up.

The main CPU 301 calculates various types of game information (continuous combination ratio, role object ratio, most recent successive role ratio, most recent role object ratio, instruction-inclusive role object ratio, bonus game ratio) according to the progress of the game, and calculates the game information. Display information corresponding to the main display 40 is displayed. The display information includes each identification information corresponding to each game information and ratio information indicating the size of the game information.

The main display 40 includes a first display section 40X and a second display section 40Y. The first display section 40X displays the above-mentioned identification information. Further, the second display section 40Y displays the above-mentioned ratio information. The first display section 40X is composed of two 7-segment displays, and the second display section 40Y is composed of two 7-segment displays. The main display 40 starts displaying display information when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, and continues to display the display information thereafter until the power is turned off. As will be described in detail later, the main display 40 displays a plurality of pieces of display information corresponding to various types of game information. Each piece of display information is switched and displayed at predetermined time intervals (about 5 seconds).

<Sub control board>
The sub-control board 400 controls the liquid crystal display device 30, the speakers (31, 32), and each lamp (for example, the performance lamp 28). As shown in FIG. 4, the sub-control board 400 is composed of a plurality of boards including a production control board 410, an image control board 420, and a sound board 430. The sub-control board 400 also includes various sensors including a production button switch 26SW and a direction specifying switch 27SW, a housing lamp 5, a production lamp 28, a stop operation order display lamp 29, a lever production lamp 42, and an upper part. Various lamps including lamp 35 are electrically connected.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a volume adjustment switch 44 is electrically connected to the sub-control board 400. The volume adjustment switch 44 is used to adjust the master volume of the gaming machine 1. As the volume adjustment switch 44, for example, a dip switch is suitably employed. As described above, the master volume can also be adjusted by operating the direction designation button 27. That is, the master volume is adjusted by operating either the direction designation button 27 or the volume adjustment switch 44.

In this embodiment, the master volume that can be adjusted is different depending on whether the direction designation button 27 is operated or the volume adjustment switch 44 is operated. Specifically, when the direction designation button 27 is operated, the master volume can be adjusted to any value from numerical value "1" to numerical value "5" (5 levels). On the other hand, when the volume adjustment switch 44 is operated, the master volume can be adjusted to any one of numerical value "1", numerical value "3", and numerical value "5" (three levels). Note that the adjustable master volume may be the same when the direction designation button 27 is operated and when the volume adjustment switch 44 is operated.

The production control board 410 is configured to include an I/F circuit 411, a sub CPU 412, a sub ROM 413, and a sub RAM 414, as shown in FIG. The effect control board 410 (sub CPU 412) controls various lamps including the housing lamp 5, the effect lamp 28, the stop operation order display lamp 29, and the lever effect lamp 42, and the sound board 430. Further, the effect control board 410 gives a command to the image control board 420 to cause the liquid crystal display device 30 to display each image.

The sub ROM 413 stores a control program executed by the sub CPU 412 and various data. For example, a performance lottery table for determining the type of performance and lamp data indicating flashing patterns of various lamps are stored in the sub ROM 413.

The sub-RAM 414 functions as a work area that volatilely stores various data. The I/F circuit 411 receives commands from the main control board 300 (I/F circuit 305). However, the main control board 300 is configured to be unable to receive commands from the sub control board 400. Commands received by the I/F circuit 411 are supplied to the sub CPU 412. The command received by the I/F circuit 411 is, for example, a display winning combination command indicating the type of winning combination stopped on the active line.

The sub CPU 412 executes the control program stored in the sub ROM 413 and controls various lamps (for example, the housing lamp 5) and the sound board 430 based on each data stored in the sub ROM 413. For example, the sub CPU 412 reads data indicating a blinking pattern of the housing lamp 5 from the sub ROM 413, and causes the housing lamp 5 to blink. Further, the sub CPU 412 generates a random number value R4 used in performance control processing, which will be described later. As the random number R4, for example, a random number in the range 0 to 65535 is preferably employed. Note that the sub ROM 413 may be composed of a single electronic component or may be composed of a plurality of electronic components (storage devices).

The image control board 420 causes the liquid crystal display device 30 to display various images in response to commands from the performance control board 410. As shown in FIG. 4, the image control board 420 includes an image control CPU 421, an image control ROM 422, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 423, a CGROM 424, and a VRAM 425.

The image control CPU 421 executes the control program stored in the image control ROM 422 and gives instructions to the VDP 423 according to commands from the production control board 410. The CGROM 424 stores compression-encoded image data (eg, texture data). The VDP 423 includes an image decoder and a drawing circuit (both not shown). When an instruction from the image control CPU 421 is input to the VDP 423, the image decoder reads image data from the CGROM 424 in accordance with the instruction. The image decoder expands (decodes) the read image data and stores it in the RAM 425. The drawing circuit causes the liquid crystal display device 30 to display various images according to the image data stored in the RAM 425. Further, the RAM 425 stores various data generated by each process of the image control CPU 421. The RAM 425 is provided with a command storage area for storing sound control commands to be sent to the sound source IC 431.

The sound board 430 is controlled by the image control CPU 421 and generates an audio signal. The acoustic signal generated by the sound board 430 is supplied to the speakers 31 and 32, and output as sound waves. As shown in FIG. 4, the sound board 430 includes a sound source IC 431 and a sound source ROM 432. The image control CPU 421 controls the sound board 430 (sound source IC 431) in response to commands from the sub CPU 412.

The sound source ROM 432 compresses and stores a plurality of audio data. Each piece of sound data is, for example, data indicating each of the sounds including a music piece in a specific ball release state, a sound that is output every time the player operates the stop button 25, and an error sound that is output in an error state. .

The sound source IC 431 generates an audio signal from the audio data in the sound source ROM 432. Further, the sound source IC 431 includes a decoder, a control register, and an A/D converter (all not shown). The decoder of the sound source IC 431 reads audio data from the sound source ROM 432 in response to instructions from the sub CPU 412 . Further, the decoder of the sound source IC 431 adjusts the volume of the read audio data, and then stores the audio data in the control register. A plurality of pieces of acoustic data are stored in the control register, and each piece of acoustic data stored in the control register is supplied to the A/D converter in the order in which it was stored. The A/D converter generates an acoustic signal from the acoustic data and supplies it to the amplifier 433. The amplifier 433 amplifies the acoustic signal supplied from the sound source IC 431 (A/D converter) and supplies it to the speakers 31 and 32. Note that the CPU that controls the sound source IC 431 may be provided separately from the sub CPU 412 and the image control CPU 421.

<Each data used by the main CPU>
The description of each circuit of the gaming machine 1 is as above. Hereinafter, various data stored in the main ROM 302 will be explained using the drawings.

FIG. 5 is a conceptual diagram of the winning area lottery table. The main CPU 301 determines a winning area using the winning area lottery table and random number value R1 in an internal lottery process to be described later. As shown in FIG. 5, each winning area lottery table is configured to include a plurality of winning areas and each lottery value corresponding to each winning area. In FIG. 5, the name of each winning area is shown. The winning area lottery table is stored in the main ROM 302 for each set value (1 to 6).

FIG. 5 illustrates a winning area lottery table that is referred to when the setting value is "2". As will be described in detail later, the gameplay when the setting value "1" is set is significantly different from the gameplay when other setting values are set. Specifically, when the set value "1" is set, the gambling nature is significantly reduced compared to when other set values are set. Therefore, some players may find the game to be uninteresting. Due to the above circumstances, depending on the administrator of the gaming machine 1, the setting value "1" may not be set in principle.

Each winning area of the winning area lottery table specifies each winning combination defined in the winning combination determination table shown in FIG. For example, assume that "Replay 1" with winning area number "01" is determined by internal lottery processing. As shown in FIG. 6, the winning area number "01" specifies the winning combination "REP1", the winning combination "REP2", and the winning combination "REP4". That is, in a game in which the winning area "Replay 1" is won, multiple types of winning combinations are designated in duplicate. The winning combination of symbols specified in the winning area is allowed to stop on the active line.

Each lottery value in the winning area lottery table is subtracted from the random number value R1 in the internal lottery process. Specifically, in the internal lottery process, the main CPU 301 subtracts each lottery value corresponding to each winning area from the random number value R1 in ascending order of the winning areas. In the internal lottery process, a winning area where the result of subtracting the lottery value from the random number value R1 is a negative number is determined. The probability that a negative number will be obtained when subtracted from the random number R1 increases as the lottery value increases. Therefore, among the winning areas, the winning area with a larger lottery value has a higher probability of winning.

As shown in FIG. 5, the winning area lottery table is configured to include each lottery value for each gaming state. Each gaming state includes a non-internal state, an internal state, and a bonus activation state. In this embodiment, the prescribed number of coins in each gaming state is three in common. Among the gaming states, the non-internal state is entered when a set value is set (changed) or after the bonus operating state ends. Note that when the set value is changed in the internal mode, the internal mode may be maintained.

The internal medium state is a gaming state in which the winning state of the RBB combination is carried over (hereinafter simply referred to as "the RBB combination is carried over"). Specifically, in this embodiment, various winning combinations including the RBB combination are determined for each game. Winning combinations other than the RBB combination are not carried over to the next game, regardless of whether the symbol combination of the winning combination is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if the symbol combination of the RBB combination is not stopped and displayed in the current game, the RBB combination is carried over to the next and subsequent games.

For example, as shown in Fig. 6, in a game where the winning area "Overlapping combination 1" has been determined, in addition to the RBB combination, the symbol combination of the winning combination "NML14, 15, 25-56" (Cherry 1) can be displayed in a static manner. Become. If the symbol combination of the RBB combination is not stopped and displayed in a game where the above winning area "Overlapping combination 1" has been determined, the RBB combination will be carried over to the next game (transferred to the internal medium state), and the other winning combinations will be transferred to the next game. Does not carry over to gaming. The above internal state is maintained until the bonus operating state is started. Note that the internal medium state of this embodiment includes a game in which the RBB combination is won.

The bonus operating state is entered when the symbol combination related to the RBB combination is stopped and displayed on the active line. The bonus operating state ends when more than 91 medals are paid out. When the bonus operating state ends, the main CPU 301 shifts to a non-internal state. In each game in the bonus operation state, as shown in FIG. 5, the winning area "all hands", the winning area "1 card hand ALL", the winning area "6 card hand ALL", or the winning area "Replay 1" wins.

In a game where the winning area "all hands" is won, the winning combination with a payout of 13 pieces (NML3-13) is displayed on the active line, and in a game where the winning area "6 card hand ALL" is won, the number of payouts is In games where the winning combination of 6 coins (NML1, 2) is stopped and displayed on the active line, and the winning area "1-card winning combination ALL" is won, the winning combination with a payout of 1 coin (NML14 to 104) is stopped on the active line. Is displayed. In a game in which the winning area "Replay 1" is won, the winning combination "REP1" is stopped and displayed on the active line. Each of the above-mentioned winning combinations is stopped and displayed on the active line in the bonus operation state, regardless of the stop operation order and stop operation position.

In this embodiment, in the non-internal state, the RBB combination can be stopped and displayed only when the winning area "RBB" is won (when the RBB combination is won alone). Moreover, once the RBB combination is missed, another winning combination will definitely be won in the subsequent internal state, so the symbol combination of the RBB combination cannot be stopped and displayed. That is, in this embodiment, the game is basically executed in the internal medium state.

7 and 8 are conceptual diagrams of the symbol combination table. FIG. 7 shows the first half of the symbol combination table, and FIG. 8 shows the second half of the symbol combination table. The symbol combination table defines combinations of symbols that are permitted to stop on the active line in a game in which each winning combination is won. For example, in a game in which the winning combination "RBB" is won, the symbol combination "Bell 2-BAR-7" is allowed to stop on the active line. For example, in a game where the winning combination "REP2" is won, the symbol combinations "Plum 1 - Cherry - Plum 1", "Bell 1 - Cherry - Plum 1", "Bell 2 - Cherry - Plum 1" are on the active line. It becomes possible to stop.

As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the symbol combination table includes the permitted bit number of each symbol combination and the number of medals to be paid out when the symbol combination associated with each winning combination stops on the active line. 7 and 8 show the number of coins to be paid out when the symbol combinations associated with each winning combination stop on the active line. For example, when the symbol combinations "Plum 1-Plum 1-Plum 1" or "Plum 2-Plum 1-Plum 1" of the winning combination "Plum A1" are stopped and displayed on the active line, the number of coins to be paid out is "6". be. Further, when the symbol combination of the RBB combination is stopped and displayed on the active line, the number of coins to be paid out is "0".

Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, the winning combinations "REP1" to "REP5" may be referred to as "middle replay," "upper replay," "down-right replay," "lower replay," and "up-right replay." Furthermore, the winning combination "NML1" and the winning combination "NML2" may be written as "Plum A1" and "Plum A2." “Plum A1” and “Plum A2” are plum combinations with a payout of 6 pieces. Similarly, the winning combinations "NML3" to "NML13" may be written as "Plum B1" to "Plum B3", "Plum B4A", "Plum B4B", and "Plum B5" to "Plum B10". . Each of the above plum combinations has a payout number of 13 pieces.

As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, each winning combination includes the winning combinations “Plum A (1, 2),” “Plum B (1 to 10),” and “1-card combination (1 to 91).” When the symbol combinations are displayed on the active line, medals are awarded to the player in a payout number corresponding to each winning combination. In this embodiment, a winning combination for which medals are paid out when displayed on the active line is referred to as a "winning winning combination". Furthermore, the fact that the symbol combination of the winning winning combination is stopped and displayed on the active line may simply be referred to as "winning."

When any of the winning combinations ``Middle Replay'', ``Upper Replay'', ``Right Down Replay'', ``Lower Replay'', and ``Right Up Replay'' is displayed on the active line, the next game is set as a replay. In the present embodiment, winning combinations whose next game is a replay when displayed on the active line may be collectively referred to as a "replay." If a plurality of winning combinations are won at the same time, the replay is stopped and displayed on the active line with priority over other winning combinations, and the RBB combination has a lower priority than the other winning combinations. However, a configuration may be adopted in which the bonus winning combination has a higher priority than the winning winning combination.

Each permission bit number in the symbol combination table specifies each display permission bit in the display permission bit storage area of the main RAM 303. The display permission bit storage area is configured to include a plurality of display permission bits, and each display permission bit corresponds to each winning combination. For example, assume that "Replay 1" with winning area number "01" is won and the symbol combinations of winning combinations "middle row replay", "upper row replay" and "lower row replay" are allowed to stop on the active line. In the above case, the display permission bit specified by the permission bit number "01", the display permission bit specified by the permission bit number "02", and the display specified by the permission bit number "04" in the display permission bit storage area are used. The permission bit is set to "1" and the others are set to "0".

The main RAM 303 stores a display combination storage area that will be compared with a display permission bit storage area in a display determination process to be described later. The display combination storage area is configured to include a plurality of displayable bits, and each displayable bit corresponds to each winning combination (same as the display permission bit storage area). In addition, each displayable bit is set to "1" when there is a possibility that the symbol combination related to the winning combination corresponding to the displayable bit stops on the active line, and the symbol combination related to the corresponding winning combination is valid. Set to ``0'' if there is no possibility of stopping on the line. For example, at the time when each reel 12 starts rotating, all the symbol combinations related to winning combinations may stop on the active line, so all displayable bits are set to "1". In addition, each displayable bit in the display combination storage area is updated every time each reel 12 stops, and corresponds to the symbol combination related to the winning combination that actually stopped on the active line when all the reels 12 stopped. Only the displayable bit becomes "1".

The winning combination won in the internal lottery process is stopped on the active line according to the operation mode of each stop button 25 by the player. Specifically, each winning combination is stopped on the active line according to the stop operation position of each stop button 25 and the order of the stop operation. For example, symbols located within a range of 4 frames (5 frames including the stop operation position) from the stop operation position (hereinafter referred to as the "pull-in range") can be stopped on the active line, and symbols located outside the pull-in range can be stopped. , even if the symbol constitutes a winning combination, it is not stopped on the active line (so-called "missing" occurs). However, if a symbol of a winning combination that can win a prize is located in the pull-in range, the symbol must be stopped on the active line (if multiple such symbols are located in the pull-in range, one of them must be stopped on the active line) .

Furthermore, as described above, multiple types of winning combinations may be won overlappingly in one game. In a game where a plurality of types of winning combinations are won, the symbol combinations related to the winning combinations according to the order of stop operations and the position of the stop operation, for example, are stopped on the active line. In this embodiment, the combinations of the type of winning combination, stop operation order, and stop operation position that have been won in the current game, and the symbol combinations to be stopped and displayed are associated one-to-one for each winning area.

As mentioned above, the types of winning combinations to be won vary depending on the order of the stop operations. As will be described in detail later, in this embodiment, it is possible to shift to a gaming state (non-internal state, internal state) in which a stop operation order is provided in which the number of medals to be paid out is unilaterally advantageous. Hereinafter, a stop operation order in which the number of medals to be paid out is unilaterally advantageous may be referred to as an "advantageous press order," and a stop operation order other than the advantageous press order may be referred to as an "unfavorable press order." Further, when the stop operation position is random, the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out when playing a game with a specific stop operation order may be written as "expected acquisition value A" for the stop operation order. The above expected acquisition value A is greater when the game is played in an advantageous order than when the game is played in an unfavorable order. However, as will be described in detail later, depending on the state of the balls being put out, if the game is played in an advantageous pressing order, penalty control is executed in which the performance of the instruction function of the instruction display 16 described above is reduced (see FIG. 19 etc. described later). ).

FIGS. 9(a) and 9(b) are diagrams for explaining a specific example of the expected acquisition value A. 9(a) and 9(b) show specific examples of the expected acquisition value A in the internal medium state of each gaming state (internal medium state, non-internal medium state, bonus activation state). Note that specific examples of the expected acquisition value A in other gaming states will be explained in detail using FIGS. 12(b) and 12(c), which will be described later.

As described above, in this embodiment, the expected acquisition value A may differ between each stop operation order. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, the stop operation order of "left first stop, middle second stop, right third stop" may be simply referred to as "left middle right." The same applies to other stopping operation orders. In addition, in this embodiment, each of the six types of stop operation orders, ``left center right'', ``left right center'', ``center left right'', ``center right left'', ``right left middle'', and ``right center left'', is set to ``order 1'' and ``order 2''. ”, “Order 3”, “Order 4”, “Order 5”, and “Order 6”. Further, any one of the above stop operation orders may be simply referred to as "order m." "m" is an integer from number "1" to number "6". Further, as shown in FIG. 9(a), the expected acquisition value A of "left middle right" (order 1) may be written as "expected acquisition value A1." Similarly, each expected acquisition value A for each stop operation order from "left and right middle" (order 2) to "right middle left" (order 6) is written as "expected acquisition value A2" to "expected acquisition value A6". There are cases.

In the internal state of this embodiment, an advantageous pressing order and an unfavorable pressing order are provided. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9(a), among the stop operation orders, "left middle right" and "left right middle" (left 1st) are the unfavorable press orders. In addition, among the stop operation orders, "middle right left", "middle left and right", "right left middle", "right middle left" (middle 1st, right 1st. Hereinafter may be collectively referred to as "irregular pressing order") are advantageous pressing orders. . However, the advantageous pressing order and the unfavorable pressing order can be changed as appropriate. For example, in each stop operation order, in addition to the left 1st, the middle 1st may be set as an unfavorable pressing order, and the right 1st may be set as an advantageous pressing order.

As shown in FIG. 9(a), when the stop operation is performed in an advantageous press order, the expected acquisition value A is larger than when the stop operation is performed in an unfavorable press order, but the performance related to the instruction function of the instruction display 16 is decreases. Therefore, in principle, the player will play with the left 1st position. Note that a specific example of a configuration for reducing the performance related to the instruction function will be described in detail later using FIGS. 18 to 22.

As described above, the unfavorable press order of the present embodiment includes multiple types of stop operation orders (left middle right, left right middle). Although details will be described later, as shown in FIG. 9A, the expected acquisition value A1 (AJmim) for "left middle right" is different from the expected acquisition value A2 (AJmax) for "left middle right". That is, the expected acquisition value A differs between each stop operation order of the disadvantageous pressing order. Specifically, the expected acquisition value A1 is smaller than the expected acquisition value A2 by the difference value XJ.

Similarly, the advantageous pressing order of the present embodiment includes a plurality of types of stop operation orders (middle left and right, middle right left, right left middle, and right middle left). The details will be described later, but as shown in FIG. 9A, the expected acquisition value A3 for "middle left and right" and the expected acquisition value A4 for "middle right left" are "AHmim" in common. That is, when playing a game in the 1st middle class, the expected acquisition value A is the same regardless of the order of stop operations. Furthermore, the expected acquisition value A5 for “right-left middle” and the expected acquisition value A6 for “right-center left” are “AHmax” in common. That is, when a game is played on the right 1st, the expected acquisition value A is the same regardless of the order of stop operations. However, the expected acquisition value A (AHmim) for the middle 1st is smaller than the expected acquisition value A (AHmax) for the right 1st by the difference value XH.

FIG. 9(b) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the difference value (X, Y). As described above, the difference between the expected acquisition values (A1, A2) in the unfavorable press order (left middle right, left right middle) is the difference value XJ. Further, the difference between the expected acquisition values of the middle 1st (A3, A4) and the right 1st (A5, A6), which are advantageous in pressing order, is a difference value XH.

In this embodiment, for the sake of explanation, the maximum expected acquisition value (A2) among the expected acquisition values (A1, A2) in the unfavorable pressing order, and the minimum expected acquisition value (A2) among the expected acquisition values (A3 to A6) in the favorable pressing order. The difference from the expected acquisition value (A3, A4) may be written as "difference value Y". As shown in FIG. 9(b), the difference value Y in the internal medium state is the expected acquisition value "AHmim" for the middle 1st in the favorable pressing order and the expected acquisition value "AJmax" for the "left and right middle" in the unfavorable pressing order. (Y=AHmim−AJmax).

In this embodiment, the expected acquisition value A is unilaterally more advantageous in the advantageous press order (irregular press order) than in the unfavorable press order (left 1st), so when playing in the advantageous press order, the above-mentioned penalty control is executed. Assume that in a configuration in which penalty control is executed in a specific stop operation order (hereinafter referred to as a "penalty order"), the expected acquisition value A of the penalty order is not unilaterally advantageous. As the above configuration, a configuration in which the above-mentioned difference value Y is not sufficiently large can be considered. In the above configuration, if a stop operation is performed in the penalty order, penalty control is executed, and the number of medals to be paid out cannot be said to be unilaterally advantageous, so the penalty order becomes excessively disadvantageous. Therefore, if the game is played in the penalty order, there may be an inconvenience that the player is at an excessive disadvantage.

In consideration of the above circumstances, the present embodiment is configured such that the difference between the expected acquisition value A in the favorable order and the expected acquisition value A in the unfavorable order is greater than or equal to a predetermined "specific value Ny". . Specifically, a configuration in which the above-mentioned difference value Y is greater than or equal to the specific value Ny is adopted (Y≧Ny). The specific value Ny in this embodiment is a numerical value "0.1". In other words, the above configuration can be said to mean that if you play 10 games in an advantageous order, the expected value of the total number of medals to be paid out will be one or more more than if you play 10 times in an unfavorable order. be done. Although the details will be described later, the difference value Y changes depending on the gaming state (non-internal state, internal state, bonus operation state) (see FIG. 12).

By the way, in the prior art, the expected acquisition value A is usually not changed between each stop operation order of the advantageous press order. Furthermore, it is normal that the expected acquisition value A is not changed between each stop operation order of the disadvantageous pressing order. That is, in the prior art, the above-mentioned difference value XJ and difference value XH are numerical values "0". However, with the above conventional techniques, there is a problem that the game lacks interest. In consideration of the above circumstances, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the expected acquisition value A is changed between each stop operation order of the advantageous press order (XJ>0). In addition, a configuration is adopted in which the expected acquisition value A is changed between each stopping operation order of the unfavorable pressing order (XH>0). The present embodiment described above has the advantage that, compared to, for example, the above-described conventional technology, the game becomes more interesting.

However, in a configuration in which the expected acquisition value A is different between each stopping operation order in the unfavorable press order, if the difference value XJ is large, the unfavorable press order in which the expected acquisition value A is the smallest may become excessively disadvantageous. Furthermore, in a configuration in which the expected acquisition value A is different between each stop operation order in the advantageous pressing order, if the difference value XH is large, the advantageous pressing order in which the expected acquisition value A is the largest may become excessively advantageous. Therefore, in each of the above configurations, players (especially beginners of the game) who do not know the expected gain A for each stop operation order are at an excessive disadvantage; A problem may arise in which the player has an excessive advantage. In other words, there may be an inconvenience that the fairness of the game is impaired.

In consideration of the above circumstances, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the difference in the expected acquisition value A is less than the predetermined value Nx between each stop operation order of the unfavorable press order. Further, a configuration is adopted in which the difference in the expected acquisition value A is less than the predetermined value Nx between each stop operation order of the advantageous press order. That is, a configuration is adopted in which the difference value XJ is less than the predetermined value Nx (XJ<Nx), and the difference value XH is less than the predetermined value Nx (XH<Nx). The predetermined value Nx in this embodiment is a numerical value "0.01". The above configuration can also be said to be such that the specific value Ny is 10 times or more the predetermined value Nx. In the above configuration, for example, compared to a configuration in which the difference value This has the advantage that disadvantageous inconveniences are suppressed. The above configuration will be described in detail later using FIGS. 10 and 11.

FIGS. 10A and 10B are diagrams for explaining a specific example of a configuration for generating the difference value X (J, H) and the difference value Y. FIG. FIG. 10(a) shows winning combinations for each combination of winning area and stop operation order. Note that the probability in parentheses that is written together with the number of coins to be paid out shown in FIG. (sometimes). In FIG. 10(a), when the number of coins to be paid out is not written in parentheses, it means that the winning combination of the number of coins to be paid out has a probability of 100%. In FIG. 10(a), winning combinations that are won in the internal medium state of each gaming state are shown for each stop operation order.

As shown in FIG. 10A, each winning area of this embodiment is divided into a specific group (Plum L, etc.) and each winning area other than the specific group (Replay, etc.). As will be described in detail later, the main CPU 301 (main control board 300) transmits a command (first command) corresponding to the winning area to the sub CPU 412 (sub control board 400). However, in a game in which a specific group wins, a common first command is transmitted regardless of the type of winning area.

For the sake of explanation, Plum L (1 to 4), Plum LC (1, 2), Plum LR (1, 2), Plum CL (1 to 4), Plum CR (1 to 4), Plum CL (5 , 6), Plum CR (5, 6), Plum RL (1, 2), Plum RC (1, 2), Plum RL (3 to 6), and Plum RC3 may be collectively referred to as "batting order Plum". In a game in which Plum L (1 to 4), Plum LC (1, 2), or Plum LR (1, 2) is won among the plums in the batting order, the winning combination "Plum A1" or the winning combination " Plum A2" can win. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, the winning combination "Plum A1" or the winning combination "Plum A2" may be collectively referred to as the "6-card plum combination".

Also, plum CL (1 to 4), plum CR (1 to 4), plum CL (5, 6), plum CR (5, 6), plum RL (1, 2), plum RC (1, 2), In a game where Plum RL (3 to 6) or Plum RC3 is won, any one of the winning combinations "Plum B1 to B10" can be won depending on the order of stop operations. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, the winning combinations "Plum B1 to B10" may be collectively referred to as the "13 Plum combination". Further, the above 6-card plum combination and 13-card plum combination may be collectively referred to as "correct plum". Further, the order of stop operations in which the correct answer plums are stopped and displayed may be referred to as "correct answer pressing order." On the other hand, a stop operation order other than the correct press order may be referred to as an "incorrect press order."

As shown in FIG. 10(a), in the game where plum L (1 to 4) out of the batting order plums was won, "left center right" and "left right middle" (left 1st) are the correct pressing order. When the stop operation is performed, a six-card plum combination (Plum A1, Plum A2) is won. For example, in a game in which Plum L1 out of Plum L (1 to 4) is won, Plum A1 (6-plum winning combination) and 1-card winning combination 12 to 1-card winning combination 19 can be stopped and displayed (see FIG. 6 above). . In the game in which Plum L1 is won, if the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order (left 1st), Plum A1 (correct plum) out of the 6 plum combinations wins.

On the other hand, in a game in which the plum L1 is won, if the stop operation is performed in an incorrect pressing order (middle 1st, right 1st), any of the 1-card winning combinations 12 to 19 winning combinations can be won. Specifically, in a game where Plum L1 is won, if the stop operation is performed in an incorrect pressing order, if the stop operation position is random, there is a 25% probability that one of the winning combinations will win, and a 75% probability that either one will win. Even the winning combinations of 2 do not win prizes (missing out occurs). The same applies to games in which plums L (2 to 4) of the plums in the batting order are won.

In a game where Plum LC (1, 2) is won among the plums in the batting order, "left center right" becomes the correct pressing order, and when the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order, which of the 6 plum combinations (Plum A1, Plum A2) Someone wins a prize. For example, in a game in which plum LC1 is won, plum A1 (6-card plum combination) and 1-card combination 12 to 1-card combination 27 can be stopped and displayed. In the game in which Plum LC1 is won, if the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order (left, center, right), Plum A1 (correct plum) out of the six plum winning combinations will be won.

On the other hand, in a game where Plum LC1 is won, if the stop operation is performed in an incorrect pressing order (other than left-center-right), any of the one-card combinations 12 to 1-card combinations 27 may be won. Specifically, in a game in which Plum LC1 is won, if the stop operation is performed in an incorrect pressing order, if the stop operation position is random, there is a 50% probability that one of the winning combinations will win, and a 50% probability that any one of the winning combinations will win. Even the winning combinations of 2 do not win prizes (missing out occurs). The same applies to a game in which plum LC2 is won among the plums in the batting order.

In a game in which Plum LR (1, 2) is won among the plums in the batting order, "Left/Right Center" becomes the correct pressing order, and if the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order, either of the 6 plum combinations (Plum A1, Plum A2) will win a prize. For example, in a game in which Plum LR1 is won, Plum A1 (6-plum winning combination) and 1-card winning combination 12 to 1-card winning combination 27 and 1-card winning combination 89 can be stopped and displayed. In the above game in which Plum LR1 is won, if the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order (left and right), Plum A1 (correct plum) out of the six plum winning combinations will be won.

On the other hand, in a game where Plum LR1 is won, if the stop operation is performed in an incorrect pressing order (other than left/right/center), any of the 1-card winning combination 12 to the 1-card winning combination 27 and the 1-card winning combination 89 can be won. Specifically, in a game where Plum LR1 is won, if the stop operation is performed in an incorrect pressing order, if the stop operation position is random, there is a 50% probability that one of the winning combinations will win, and a 50% probability that any one of the winning combinations will win. Even the winning combinations of 2 do not win prizes (missing out occurs). The same applies to a game in which plum LR2 out of the plums in the batting order is won.

In a game in which Plum CL (1 to 4) out of the plums in the batting order is won, "middle left and right" is the correct pressing order, and when the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order, a 13-piece plum combination (Plum B1) is won. For example, in a game in which Plum CL1 is won, Plum B1 (13 plum combination) and each 1-card combination (1, 2, 7, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32, 36, 40, 44, 70, 90) can be stopped and displayed. In the game in which Plum CL1 is won, if the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order (middle left and right), Plum B1 (correct plum) out of the 13 plum combinations will be won.

On the other hand, in a game where Plum CL1 is won, if the stop operation is performed in an incorrect pressing order (other than middle left/right), any one of the above-mentioned one-card combinations can be won. Specifically, in a game where Plum CL1 was won, if the stop operation is performed at the left 1st position (left middle right, left right middle) among the incorrect presses, if the stop operation position is random, there is a 25% probability that one piece will be won. There is a 75% chance that one of the winning combinations will win, and that there will be a loss. In addition, in a game where Plum CL1 was won, if the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order (middle right left, right left middle, right middle left) among the incorrect press orders, any one of the 1-card combinations will be played regardless of the stop operation position. Win a prize. The same applies to games where plums CL (2 to 4) out of the plums in the batting order are won.

In a game in which Plum CR (1 to 4) out of the plums in the batting order is won, "middle right left" is the correct pressing order, and when the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order, a 13-piece plum combination (Plum B2) is won. For example, in a game in which Plum CR1 is won, Plum B2 (13 Plum winning combination) and each 1-card winning combination (1, 6, 7, 12-19, 51-54) can be stopped and displayed. In the above game where Plum CR1 is won, if the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order (middle right, left), Plum B2 (correct plum) out of the 13 plum winning combinations will be won.

On the other hand, in a game in which Plum CR1 is won, if the stop operation is performed in an incorrect pressing order (other than center, right, left), any one of the above-mentioned one-card combinations may be won. Specifically, in a game where Plum CR1 is won, if the stop operation is performed at the left 1st position (left middle right, left right middle) among the incorrect presses, if the stop operation position is random, there is a 25% probability that one piece will be won. There is a 75% chance that one of the winning combinations will win, and that there will be a loss. In addition, in a game where Plum CR1 was won, if the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order (center left, right left middle, right center left) among the incorrect press orders, any one of the winning combinations will be played regardless of the stop operation position. Win a prize. The same applies to games in which plum CR (2 to 4) out of the plums in the batting order is won.

In a game in which plum CL (5, 6) out of the plums in the batting order is won, "middle left and right" is the correct pressing order, and when a stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order, a 13-piece plum combination (plum B3) is won. For example, in a game in which Plum CL5 was won, Plum B3, Plum B9 (13-card plum role), and 1-card each (1, 2, 7, 12 to 19, 52, 53, 55, 56, 77, 79, 86 ~88) can be stopped and displayed. In the above game in which plum CL5 is won, if the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order (middle left/right), plum B3 (correct plum) out of the 13 plum winning combinations will be won.

On the other hand, in a game in which Plum CL5 is won, if the stop operation is performed in an incorrect pressing order (other than middle left/right), any one of the above-mentioned one-card combinations can be won. Specifically, in a game where Plum CL5 was won, if the stop operation is performed at the left 1st position (left center right, left right center) among the incorrect press orders, if the stop operation position is random, there is a 25% probability that one piece will be won. There is a 75% chance that one of the winning combinations will win, and that there will be a loss. In addition, in a game where Plum CL5 was won, if the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order (middle right left, right left middle, right middle left) among the incorrect press orders, any one of the 1-card combinations will be played regardless of the stop operation position. Win a prize. The same applies to a game in which plum CL6 is won among the plums in the batting order.

In a game where Plum CR (5, 6) out of the plums in the batting order is won, "middle right left" becomes the correct pressing order, and when the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order, a 13-piece plum combination (Plum B4A, B4B, B10) is won. do. For example, in a game where Plum CR5 was won, Plum B4A, Plum B4B, Plum B10 (13-card plum role) and 1-card each role (1, 2, 19, 28-35, 55, 58, 59, 77, 79, 86 to 88) can be stopped and displayed. In the above game in which Plum CR5 is won, if the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order (center right, left), either Plum B4A or Plum B4B (correct Plum) will always win a prize depending on the stop operation position.

On the other hand, in a game where Plum CR5 is won, if the stop operation is performed in an incorrect pressing order (other than middle, right, left), any of the above-mentioned one-card combinations can be won. Specifically, in a game in which Plum CR5 was won, if the stop operation is performed at the left 1st position (left center right, left right center) among the incorrect press orders, if the stop operation position is random, there is a 25% probability that one piece will be won. There is a 75% chance that one of the winning combinations will win, and that there will be a loss. In addition, in a game where Plum CR5 was won, if the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order (center left, right left middle, right center left) among the incorrect press orders, any one of the 1-card combinations will be played regardless of the stop operation position. Win a prize. The same applies to a game in which plum CR6 among the plums in the batting order is won.

In a game in which plum RL (1, 2) out of the plums in the batting order is won, "right, left, middle" is the correct pressing order, and when a stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order, a 13-piece plum combination (plum B6) is won. For example, in a game where Plum RL1 was won, Plum B6 (13 plum combination) and each 1-card combination (1, 2, 7, 8-12, 17, 23, 24, 30, 37, 66, 90) are stopped. It becomes displayable. In the above game in which plum RL1 is won, if the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order (right, left, middle), plum B6 (correct plum) is won.

On the other hand, in a game in which Plum RL1 is won, if the stop operation is performed in an incorrect pressing order (other than right, left, middle), any one of the above-mentioned one-card combinations can be won. Specifically, in a game where Plum RL1 is won, if the stop operation is performed at the left 1st position (left middle right, left right middle) among the incorrect presses, if the stop operation position is random, there is a 25% probability that one piece will be won. There is a 75% chance that one of the winning combinations will win, and that there will be a loss. In addition, in a game where Plum RL1 was won, if the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order (middle left, middle right left, right middle left) among the incorrect press orders, any one of the 1-card combinations will be played regardless of the stop operation position. Win a prize. The same applies to a game in which plum RL2 out of the plums in the batting order is won.

In a game in which Plum RC (1, 2) is won among the plums in the batting order, "right center left" is the correct pressing order, and when the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order, 13 plums (Plum B5) are won. For example, in a game in which Plum RC1 was won, Plum B5 (13 plums) and 1 each (1, 2, 7, 8 to 11, 14, 21, 28, 33, 39, 40, 68, 90) can be stopped and displayed. In the game in which Plum RC1 is won, if the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order (right, left, center), Plum B5 (correct plum) will be won.

On the other hand, in a game where Plum RC1 is won, if the stop operation is performed in an incorrect pressing order (other than right-center-left), any one of the above-mentioned one-card combinations can be won. Specifically, in a game where Plum RC1 is won, if the stop operation is performed at the left 1st position (left center right, left right center) among the incorrect presses, if the stop operation position is random, there is a 25% probability that one piece will be won. There is a 75% chance that one of the winning combinations will win, and that there will be a loss. In addition, in a game where Plum RC1 was won, if the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order (middle left/right, middle right left, right/left middle) among the incorrect press orders, one of the winning combinations will be won regardless of the stop operation position. do. The same applies to a game in which plum RC2 out of the plums in the batting order is won.

In a game where Plum RL (3 to 6) is won among the plums in the batting order, "Right, Left, Center" is the correct pressing order, and when the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order, a 13-piece plum combination (Plum B7) is won. For example, in a game where Plum RL3 is won, Plum B7 (13 Plum winning combination) and each 1-card winning combination (2, 8 to 11, 16, 23, 30, 50, 54, 73, 78) can be stopped and displayed. . In the game in which Plum RL3 is won, if the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order (right, left, center), Plum B7 (correct Plum) will be won.

On the other hand, in a game where Plum RL3 is won, if the stop operation is performed in an incorrect pressing order (other than right, left, middle), any of the above-mentioned one-card combinations can be won. Specifically, in a game where Plum RL3 was won, if the stop operation is performed at the left 1st position (left center right, left right center) among the incorrect press orders, if the stop operation position is random, there is a 25% probability that one piece will be won. There is a 75% chance that one of the winning combinations will win, and that there will be a loss. In addition, in a game where Plum RL3 was won, if the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order (center left, center right left, right center left) among the incorrect press orders, any one of the 1-card combinations will be played regardless of the stop operation position. Win a prize. The same applies to games in which plums RL (4 to 6) out of the plums in the batting order are won.

In a game in which plum RC3 out of the plums in the batting order is won, "right middle left" is the correct pressing order, and when a stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order, plum B8 among the 13 plums wins. Specifically, in a game in which Plum RC3 is won, Plum B8 (13 Plum winning combination) and each 1-card winning combination (1, 2, 53-55, 70-76) can be stopped and displayed. On the other hand, in a game where Plum RC3 is won, if the stop operation is performed in an incorrect pressing order (other than right-center-left), one of the above-mentioned one-card combinations will definitely win.

As shown in FIG. 10(a), if the one-card winning combination (1 to 4) is won, the one-card winning combination can be won regardless of the order of the stop operations. For example, in a game where a one-card winning combination is won, one-card combinations 12 to 19 can be stopped and displayed. In a game where a one-card winning combination is won, if the stop operation position is random, one of the one-card combinations will win with a probability of 25% and will be missed with a probability of 75%, regardless of the order of the stop operations. The same goes for the other one-card combinations (2 to 4). This concludes the explanation of the winning combinations that are won in the game in which the specific group (batting order plum, single-choice combination) wins.

When Replay (1 to 3) out of the winning areas is won, any of the Replay symbol combinations is stopped and displayed regardless of the stop operation order and stop operation position. Note that if the replay symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the next game will be a replay and no medals will be paid out. However, the expected acquisition value A of this embodiment is calculated on the assumption that a prescribed number (3) of medals are paid out in a game in which the replay symbol combination is stopped and displayed.

If a cherry (1, 2) is won in the winning area, any one of the one-card combinations (1, 2, 12 to 43) will win, regardless of the stop operation order and stop operation position. Furthermore, if the bell in the winning area is won, any one of the 1-card combinations (1 to 7, 12 to 43, 87, 92, and 93) will be won regardless of the stop operation order and stop operation position. If the reach winning combination (1 to 5) in the winning area is won, a 1-card winning combination or a 13-card plum winning combination will be won depending on the order of stop operations. Specifically, in a game in which the reach winning combination (1 to 5) is won, if a stop operation is performed on the left 1st, any one of the 1-card winning combinations will be stopped and displayed regardless of the stop operation position. On the other hand, in a game where the reach winning combination (1 to 5) is won, if the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order, the 13 plum combination will be won regardless of the stop operation position.

The details will be described later, but each winning area (batting order plum, one-choice role, replay 1-3, cherry 1, 2, bell, reach role 1-5) has a difference value X (J, H) This is a winning area that does not cause On the other hand, the reach character 6 and the reach character 7 described below are winning areas that produce the difference value X.

As shown in FIG. 10(a), in a game where the reach winning combination 6 is won, if the stop operation is performed with "left center right", if the stop operation position is random, one of the 1-card winning combinations will win with a probability of 70%. , there is a 30% probability that the item will be missed. On the other hand, in a game where reach number 6 has been won, if you perform a stop operation at "left/right center", if the stop operation position is random, there is an 85% chance that one of the winning combinations will win, and a 15% chance that you will miss out. do. In addition, in a game where the reach winning combination 6 is won, if a stop operation is performed at the middle 1st (middle left and right, middle right and left), any one of the one-card winning combinations will be won regardless of the stop operation position. On the other hand, in a game where the reach winning combination 6 is won, if the stop operation is performed on the right 1st (right left middle, right middle left), a 13 plum combination will be won regardless of the stop operation position.

In a game in which reach number 7 has been won, if you perform a stop operation with "left center right", if the stop operation position is random, one of the 1-card winning combinations will win with a probability of 68.5%, and with a probability of 31.5%. Missing items will occur. On the other hand, in a game where reach number 7 has been won, if you perform a stop operation at "left/right center", if the stop operation position is random, there is a 70% chance that one of the winning combinations will win, and a 30% chance that you will miss out. do. Furthermore, in a game where the reach winning combination 7 is won, if the stop operation is performed at the middle 1st (middle left/right, middle right/left), a 13-piece plum combination will be won regardless of the stop operation position. Similarly, in a game where the reach winning combination 7 is won, if the stop operation is performed on the right 1st (right left middle, right middle left), the 13 plum winning combination will be won regardless of the stop operation position.

In addition, the 1-card winning combination that is won in a game in which the reach mark (1 to 7) is won will not be won if the stop operation is performed on the left 1st in a game in which other winning areas are won. Therefore, depending on the type of winning one-card combination (symbol combination), the player can determine whether or not the winning combination has been won in the current game. Furthermore, if a miss occurs in a game in which the reach mark 6 or 7 is won, the symbol combination (reach mark) that is not stopped and displayed in the game in which other winning areas are won is stopped and displayed.

With the above configuration, when the stop operation is performed on the left 1st, it becomes possible to detect that the reach symbol has been won from the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed, regardless of whether or not there is a missed win. However, winning combinations that are won in an irregular press order may be common to the reach winning combination and other winning areas. Therefore, when the stop operation is performed in an irregular pressing order, it is difficult (including cases where it is virtually impossible) to detect from the symbol combination that the reach symbol has been won. It should be noted that the reach position in the case where a miss occurs may be the same for the reach position 6 and the reach position 7, or may be different.

The method for calculating the expected acquisition value A will be explained in detail below. The expected acquisition value Am of the stop operation order m (m=1, 2, 3, . . . 6) is determined by the following formula. In addition, in this embodiment, for explanation, a group number n (n=1, 2, 3...18) is assigned to each group of each winning area explained in FIG. 10(a). For example, the group number 1 is assigned to the winning area group of Plum L (1 to 4) (n=1). In Equation 1, "n" means a group number.

"Nnm" in Equation 1 is the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out in a game in which the winning area of group number n wins (hereinafter referred to as "partial expected value Nnm") when the stop operation is performed in order m. The expected acquisition value Am when the stop operation is performed in order m is the expected value of the number of medals awarded in a game in which the winning area of group number 1 is won, and the medals awarded in a game in which the winning area of group number 2 is won. It is the sum of the expected value of the number of medals and the expected value of the number of medals awarded in the game where the winning area of group number 18 is won. That is, as can be understood from Equation 1, the expected value Am obtained when the stop operation is performed in order m is the sum of the partial expected values N(1, m) to N(18, m) (Am =N(1,m)+N(2,m)...+N(18,m)). Note that the specific numerical value of the partial expected value Nnm will be explained in FIG. 10(b).

"Hnm" in Equation 1 means the number of payout coins that can be awarded when the stop operation is performed in order m in a game in which the winning area of group number n wins. That is, the payout number Hnm means the payout number of winning combinations that can be won (targeted for attraction) when the stop operation is performed in order m in a game in which the winning area of group number n wins. As described above, even in games where a common winning area is won, the winning combinations that can be won vary depending on the order of stop operations. Therefore, the payout number Hnm changes depending on the order m even if the winning areas are common (even if n is common).

For example, assume a game in which a plum CL of group number 4 is won (n=4). In the above game, if the stop operation is performed in order 1 (left center right: incorrect answer press order) (m=1), it is possible to win a 1-card combination. Therefore, the payout number H(4,1) in order 1 in the game in which Plum CL is won is "1" (H(4,1)=1 when n=4 and m=1). On the other hand, in a game where Plum CL of group number 4 is won, if the stop operation is performed in order 3 (middle left/right: correct press order) (m=3), it is possible to win the correct Plum (13 cards). Therefore, the payout number H(4,3) for order 3 in the game in which Plum CL is won is "13" (H(4,3)=13 when n=4 and m=3). Similarly, in a game in which Plum CL of group number 4 is won, if the stop operation is performed in order 4 (middle right left: incorrect release order) (m = 4), it is possible to win a 1-card combination, so the number of paid-out coins H (4,4) is "1" sheet (if n=4, m=4, H(4,4)=1).

"Pan" in Equation 1 means the probability that any one of the winning areas of group number n will win. In FIG. 10A, the numerical value obtained by multiplying the probability Pan when the setting value is "2" by the numerical value "65536" is shown for each group number n. The numerical value means the total value of each lottery value (see FIG. 5 above) of each winning area of the group number. For example, the probability Pa4 that any one of the plums CL (1 to 4) of group number 4 will win is 4500/65536 (Pa4=(1125+1125+1125+1125)/65536).

"Pbnm" in Equation 1 means the probability of attracting a winning combination when the winning area of group number n is won and the stop operation is performed in order m. The above attraction probability Pb is the probability that the winning combination will win if the stopping operation is performed in the order in which the winning combination is stopped and displayed (the order in which the winning combination is subject to attraction) and the stop operation position is random. . As described above, even if a common winning area is won, the winning combination to be drawn will change depending on the order of stop operations. Therefore, even if the game has a common winning area, the attraction probability Pbnm changes depending on the order of stop operations.

For example, in a game where the plum CL (1 to 4) of group number 4 is won (n=4), if the stop operation is performed in order 1 (m=1), if the stop operation position is random, the 1-card winning combination is The probability of winning is 25% (see Figure 10). Therefore, the attraction probability Pb(4,1) is "0.25" (in the case of n=4 and m=1, Pb(4,1)=0.25). In addition, in a game where Plum CL of group number 4 is won (n = 4), if the stop operation is performed in order 3 (correct answer pressing order) (m = 3), a 13-piece plum combination will be won regardless of the stop operation position. . Therefore, the attraction probability Pb(4,3) becomes "1" (in the case of n=4 and m=3, Pb(4,3)=1). In a game where the plum CL of group number 4 is won (n=4), if the stop operation is performed in order 4 (m=4), a 1-card winning combination is won regardless of the stop operation position. Therefore, the attraction probability Pb(4,4) becomes "1" (in the case of n=4 and m=4, Pb(4,4)=1).

As described above, the partial expected value Nnm is the product of the payout number Hnm, the winning probability Pan, and the attraction probability Pbnm (Nnm=Hnm×Pan×Pbnm). For example, the winning probability Pa4 of plum CL (1 to 4) of group number 4 is 4500/65536. In addition, when the plum CL (1 to 4) of group number 4 is won and the stop operation is performed in order 3, the draw probability Pb (4, 3) is "1" and the payout number H (4, 3) is It is "13". Therefore, the partial expectation value N(4,3) is approximately "0.892639" (N(4,3)=H(4,3)×Pa4×Pb(4,3)=13×(4500/ 65536)×1≈0.892639 (see FIG. 10(b)).

FIG. 10(b) shows a specific example of the partial expected value Nnm for each combination of the group number (n) of the winning area and the stop operation order (m). Specifically, FIG. 10(b) shows the partial expected value Nnm in the internal medium state among each gaming state. For example, as mentioned above, when the plum CL (1 to 4) of group number 4 is won and the stop operation is performed in order 3 (n = 4, m = 3), the partial expected value N (4, 3) is It is approximately "0.892639". However, in FIG. 10(b), the portions after the seventh decimal point of the partial expected value Nnm are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 10(b), when the winning area of group number 1 is won, the partial expected value Nnm is common between order 1 (left middle right) and order 2 (left middle right) among the unfavorable pressing orders. Specifically, the partial expected value N(1,1) and the partial expected value N(1,2) have approximately "0.420776" in common. On the other hand, if either the winning area of group number 2 or group number 3 wins, the partial expected value Nnm will be different between order 1 (center left, right) and order 2 (center left and right) among the unfavorable press orders (N (2,1)≠N(2,2), N(3,1)≠N(3,2)).

However, as shown in Figure 10(b), the partial expected value N(2,1) when the winning area of group number 2 is won and the stop operation is performed in order 1, and the winning area of group number 3 is winning. The partial expected value N(3,2) when the stop operation is performed in order 2 is approximately "0.456116", which is common. Also, the partial expected value N (2, 2) when the winning area of group number 2 is won and the stop operation is performed in order 2, and the partial expected value N (2, 2) when the winning area of group number 3 is won and the stop operation is performed in order 1. The partial expected value N(3,1) in the case is approximately "0.038010" and is common.

As shown in FIG. 10(b), in any of the winning areas of group numbers 4 to 16, the partial expected value Nnm is Common. For example, in the case of group number 4, the partial expected value N(4,1) of order 1 and the partial expected value N(4,2) of order 2 are approximately "0.017166" in common.

Similarly, for group numbers 5 to 10, each of the partial expected value N(5,1) of order 1, partial expected value N(6,1)... partial expected value N(10,1) is the partial expected value N(10,1) of order 2. It is approximately "0.017166" in common with each of the expected value N(5,2), partial expected value N(6,2), . . . partial expected value N(10,2). Also, for group numbers 11 to 16, partial expected value N(11,1) and partial expected value N(11,2), partial expected value N(12,1) and partial expected value N(12,2), partial expected value N(13,1) and partial expected value N(13,2), partial expected value N(14,1) and partial expected value N(14,2), partial expected value N(15,1) and The partial expected value N(15,2), the partial expected value N(16,1), and the partial expected value N(16,2) are common.

As understood from the above explanation, the total value of the partial expected values Nnm for group numbers 1 to 16 is common to each other in the unfavorable press order (order 1, order 2). The above configuration can also be said to mean that each winning area of group numbers 1 to 16 does not produce the difference value XJ. Further, although a detailed explanation is omitted, as can be understood from FIG. 10(b), the total value of the partial expected values Nnm for group numbers 1 to 16 is common among the advantageous pressing orders (orders 3 to 6). become. The above configuration can also be said to mean that each winning area of group numbers 1 to 16 does not generate the difference value XH.

On the other hand, the partial expected value Nnm of group number 17 (reach position 6) is approximately "0.000075" in order 1 of the unfavorable push order (N (17, 1) ≒ 0.000075), and in order 2 It is "0.000091" (N(17,2)≈0.000091). Also, the partial expected value Nnm of group number 18 (reach role 7) is "0.000073" in order 1 of the unfavorable push order (N (18, 1) ≒ 0.000073), and " 0.000075'' (N(18,2)≈0.000075). In the above configuration, the total value of the partial expected values Nnm of group number 17 and group number 18 is different depending on the unfavorable press order. The above configuration can also be said to mean that each winning area of group number 17 and group number 18 produces a difference value XJ.

In addition, the partial expected value Nnm of group number 17 (reach position 6) is "0.000107" in order 3 and order 4 (middle 1st) of the advantageous press order (N (17, 3) = N ( 17,4)≈0.000107), and “0.001389” in order 5 and order 6 (right 1st) (N(17,5)=N(17,6)≈0.001389). On the other hand, the partial expected value Nnm of group number 18 (reach position 7) is "0.001389" in common for both advantageous push orders (N (18, 3) = N (18, 4) = N ( 18,5)=N(18,6)≒0.001389). In the above configuration, the total value of the partial expected values Nnm of group number 17 and group number 18 is different depending on the advantageous pressing order. The above configuration can also be said to mean that each winning area of group number 17 and group number 18 produces a difference value XH.

As described above, in this embodiment, the difference value XJ and the difference value XH are larger than the numerical value "0" in the internal medium state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10(b), the expected acquisition value A1 for order 1 of the disadvantageous pressing order is approximately "1.568396", and the expected acquisition value A2 for order 2 is approximately "1.568414". It is. That is, the difference value XJ is approximately "0.000018". Also, among the advantageous push orders, the expected acquisition value A of orders 3 and 4 is approximately "2.766903", and the expected acquisition value A of orders 5 and 6 is approximately "2.768185". It is. That is, the difference value XH is approximately "0.001282".

Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, in a game in which a specific winning area is won, the winning winning combination and the stopping operation mode (order, position) for winning the winning combination are common to each game. "Stop control is common" may be written. As long as the winning area is common, the stop control in each game is basically the same in the internal medium state and the non-internal medium state. However, among the plums in the batting order, plum CL (5, 6) (group number 6), plum CR (5, 6) (group number 7), plum RL (1, 2) (group number 8), and plum RL (1, 2) In the game in which (group number 9) is won, the stop control is different between the internal medium state and the non-internal medium state.

Specifically, if the above-mentioned plum in the batting order is won in a non-internal medium state, any one of the one-card winning combinations will be won regardless of the stopping operation mode. That is, if the above-mentioned batting order plum is won in the non-internal medium state, even if a stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order in the internal medium state, any one of the winning combinations will win, and the correct plum will not win. In the above configuration, the partial expected value N(6,3) of group number 6 and order 3 (correct press order) is approximately "0.892639" in the internal medium state (see FIG. 10(b)), In the non-internal state, it becomes approximately "0.068665" (decreases).

Similarly, the partial expected value N(7,4) for group number 7 and order 4 (correct press order) is approximately "0.892639" in the internal medium state, but approximately "0.068665" in the non-internal medium state. "become. The partial expected value N(8, 5) for group number 8 and order 5 (correct press order) is approximately "0.892639" in the internal medium state, but approximately "0.068665" in the non-internal medium state. . The partial expected value N(9,6) of group number 9 and order 6 (correct answer pressing order) is approximately "0.892639" in the internal medium state, but becomes approximately "0.068665" in the non-internal medium state. .

In this embodiment, in a game in which a redundant combination 1 (cherry 1) is won in a non-internal medium state, the stop control is common to a game in which a cherry 1 is won in an internal medium state. Similarly, a game that won duplicate combination 2 (cherry 2) has the same stop control as the game that won cherry 2, and a game that won redundant combination 3 (bell) has the same stop control as the game that won red. becomes common, and in games that win overlapping combinations 4 to 10 (reach positions 1 to 7), the stop control becomes common to games that win overlapping positions 1 to 7, and overlap positions 11 to 14 (choice 1) In the games in which the winning combinations 1 to 4) are won, the stop control is common to the games in which the winning combinations 1 to 4 are won.

By the way, in each winning area, group number 12 (one-card role), group number 13 (replay), group number 14 (cherry), and group number 15 (bell) have an expected acquisition value A regardless of the order of stop operations. Common. In other words, the winning area (hereinafter referred to as the "common winning area") is a winning area that does not cause differential values (X, Y) without considering the partial expected values N of each stop operation order of other winning areas. It can also be said that there is. In particular, group number 13 (replay) and group number 15 (bell) are winning areas that do not produce a difference value regardless of the stop operation position. In other words, in this embodiment, even in a game in which the common winning area is won, penalty control is executed if the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order.

FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining details of the configuration for generating the difference value X(J,H). In this embodiment, the difference value X is generated by appropriately switching the winning combination drawn into the active line according to the stop operation order and the stop operation position. As described above, the symbol combinations to be stopped and displayed on the active line are predetermined for each combination of the stop operation order, the stop operation position, and the winning area. Specifically, in this embodiment, even if the winning area is common, the type of "draw-in control" of the symbols changes depending on the order of stop operations. The "draw-in control" of this embodiment includes "symbol number priority control" and "payout number priority control".

First, prior to the configuration for generating the difference value X (draw-in control of the reach numbers 6 and 7), the draw-in control when a plum in the batting order is won will be explained. For example, in a game in which Plum CL1 is won as described above, Plum B1 (13 Plum winning combination) and each 1-card winning combination (1, 2, 7, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32, 36, 40, 44 , 70, 90) can be stopped and displayed. In the above-described game in which the plum CL1 is won, if the stop operation is performed in "middle left/right" (correct answer pressing order), all the reels 12 are stopped by payout number priority control. However, the type of retraction control may be switched midway between the first stop operation and the third stop operation.

In the payout number priority control, among the winning combination symbols that can be won, the symbol of the winning combination with the largest number of payouts is stopped and displayed in priority to the active line. Therefore, in a game in which Plum CL1 is won, the symbol combination of Plum B1 is stopped and displayed on the active line. In addition, when multiple types of winning combinations with the largest number of payout coins can be won, when the payout number priority control is executed, the symbol of the winning combination predetermined according to the stop operation position is stopped and displayed on the active line.

On the other hand, in a game in which Plum CL1 is won, if a stop operation is performed at the left 1st or right 1st (incorrectly pressed order), the first reel 12 is stopped by symbol number priority control. When the reel 12 is stopped due to symbol number priority control, the reel 12 is stopped so that the number of types of symbol combinations of winning combinations that can be won after the reel 12 is stopped is maximized. In addition, if there are multiple stop positions (symbols) where the number of types of symbol combinations of winning combinations that can win a prize is maximum, when symbol number priority control is executed, a predetermined winning combination is selected according to the stop operation position. The symbol will be stopped and displayed on the active line.

For example, in a game where Plum CL1 is won, each of the above-mentioned 1-card combinations (1, 2, 7, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32, 36, 40, 44, 70, 90) can be won. . In the above game where Plum CL1 was won, when the "Plum 1 symbol" is stopped and displayed on the active line at the first stop on the left, there are 6 types of 1-card combinations (12, 20, 28, 36, 44, 70). The symbol combination can be stopped and displayed on the active line depending on the subsequent stop operation position (see FIGS. 7 and 8). Similarly, in a game where Plum CL1 is won, when the "Plum 2 symbol" is stopped and displayed on the active line at the first stop on the left, six types of one-card combinations (16, 24, 32, 40, 44, 70 ) can be stopped and displayed on the active line depending on the subsequent stop operation position.

On the other hand, if the left symbol of Plum B1 (13-card combination) is stopped and displayed on the active line at the first left stop, there are four types of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line thereafter (see FIG. 7). Therefore, in a game where Plum CL1 is won, if the left first stop is made, the 1-card winning symbols (Plum 1 symbol, Plum 2 symbol) are given priority over Plum B1 (13-card winning combination) and are stopped and displayed on the active line. Ru. If Plum CL1 is stopped first on the right in a winning game, the number of symbols priority control is executed in the same way as when it is stopped first on the left, and the symbols in the 1-card combination (Plum 1 symbol, Plum 2 symbol) are given priority. The active line will be displayed stopped.

In addition, if the stop operation is performed at "middle right left" in the incorrect press order, the correct press order is until the first middle stop, so the payout number priority control is executed at the first middle stop, and plum B1's "cherry" is pressed. "Design" is stopped and displayed on the active line. In the above case, in addition to the symbol combinations (5 types) of Plum B1, 6 types of 1-card roles (1, 2, 90) (1 type of 1-card role 1, 3 types of 1-card role 2, 1-card role A total of 6 types of symbol combinations (2 types of 90) can be displayed in a static manner (see FIGS. 7 and 8). If the right second stop is made after the middle first stop, the right reel 12 will stop due to symbol number priority control, and any right symbol of each of the above-mentioned one-card combinations will be stopped and displayed on the active line. On the other hand, when the left second stop is performed after the middle first stop (when the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order), the left reel 12 is stopped under payout number priority control, and the left symbol of Plum B1 is stopped and displayed on the active line.

FIG. 11(a-1) is a diagram for explaining the attraction probability (Pb of Equation 1 above) of each winning combination in a game in which the reach winning combination 6 is won. As will be explained in detail below, in a game where the reach number 6 or reach number 7 is won, symbol number priority control is executed when the reel 12 is stopped at the first left stop, and in other cases (second stop, When the reels 12 are stopped at the third stop, middle first stop, and right first stop), payout number priority control is executed. However, when the first stop is made in a game in which the reach symbol 6 is won, the symbol number priority control is executed as an exception.

As described above, the reach mark 6 is a winning area that produces the difference value XJ. FIG. 11(a-1) shows the pull-in probability when the stop operation is performed at "left center right". In a game where the reach winning combination 6 is won, if the stop operation is performed at "left middle right", any one of the one-card winning combinations can win (see FIG. 10(a)). Specifically, in a game in which the reach symbol 6 is won, if the left first stop is made, the left reel 12 is stopped by symbol number priority control. In the above case, depending on the stop operation position of the left reel 12, the left symbol (replay symbol) or 1 of the 1-card winning combination 1 or the 1-card winning combination 57 (hereinafter abbreviated as "1-card winning combination 1, 57", etc.) The left symbols (Bell 1 symbol, Bell 2 symbol) of the winning combinations 49, 50, and 85 are stopped and displayed on the active line.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11(a-1), when the left reel 12 is stopped at symbol positions 6 to 17 (12 frames), the left symbol of 1 winning combination 1, 57 is stopped and displayed on the active line. . When the left symbols of the one-card combinations 1 and 57 are stopped and displayed on the active line, the one-card combinations 49, 50, and 85 whose left symbols are bell (1, 2) symbols become impossible to win. In a game in which the reach winning combination 6 is won, if the middle second stop is made after the left first stop, the middle reel 12 is stopped by payout number priority control.

In the above configuration, when the left reel 12 is stopped at symbol positions 6 to 17 (12 frames), regardless of the stop operation position of the middle second stop (when the left reel 12 is stopped at any of symbol positions 0 to 19) ), the middle symbol of 1-card winning combination 1 (cherry symbol) or the middle symbol of 1-card winning combination 57 (bell 1 to 4 symbols) can be drawn into the active line. In this embodiment, at the middle second stop, the middle symbol of the one-card combination 57 is stopped and displayed on the active line (one-card combination 1 becomes impossible to win). After that, when the right third stop is made, the right reel 12 is stopped by the payout number priority control, and the right symbol of the 1-card winning combination 57 is stopped and displayed on the active line regardless of the stop operation position. As can be understood from the above explanation, if the stop operation is performed at "left center right" in a game where the reach winning combination 6 is won, the probability of drawing in the 1-card winning combination 57 is 4800 (12 x 20 x 20) / 8000. .

In a game where the reach symbol 6 has been won, when the left reel 12 is stopped at symbol positions 0 to 5, 18, 19 (8 frames), the left symbol of the 1-piece symbol 49, 50, 85 (bell 1, 2) symbol) will be stopped and displayed on the active line. When the left symbols of the 1-card combinations 49, 50, and 85 are stopped and displayed on the active line, the 1-card combinations 1 and 57 whose left symbols are replay symbols become impossible to win. Thereafter, when the middle reel 12 is subjected to a second stop operation at symbol positions 2 to 6 (5 frames), the middle symbol (Bell 1 symbol) of the 1-piece winning combination 49 is stopped and displayed on the active line. When the middle symbol of the one-card combination 49 is stopped and displayed on the active line, the one-card combinations 50 and 85 become impossible to win. After that, when the right reel 12 is operated for a third stop at symbol position 8 to 12 (5 frames), the right symbol (seven symbol) of the 1-piece winning combination 49 will be stopped and displayed on the active line (the 1-card winning combination 49 will win the prize). do). On the other hand, when the right reel 12 is operated for a third stop at symbol positions 0 to 7 and 13 to 19 (15 frames), the right symbol of the 1-card winning combination 49 is not located within the pull-in range, resulting in a missed win. As can be understood from the above explanation, if the stop operation is performed at "left center right" in a game where the reach winning combination 6 is won, the probability of drawing in the 1-card winning combination 49 is 200 (8 x 5 x 5) / 8000. .

In a game where reach number 6 is won, the left reel 12 is stopped at symbol positions 0 to 5, 18, and 19 (8 frames), and the middle reel 12 is stopped at symbol positions 0, 1, 7 to 19 (15 frames). When the second stop operation is performed, the middle symbols (Bell 2 to 4 symbols) of the 1-card combination 50 are stopped and displayed on the active line (the 1-card combination 50 becomes tenpai). When the middle symbol of the one-card combination 50 is stopped and displayed on the activated line, the one-card combinations 49 and 85 become impossible to win. After that, when the right reel 12 is operated for the third stop at symbol position 8 to 12 (5 frames), the right symbol (seven symbol) of 1-card winning combination 50 is stopped and displayed on the active line (1-card winning combination 50 is a winning prize) do). On the other hand, when the right reel 12 is operated for a third stop at symbol positions 0 to 7 and 13 to 19 (15 frames), the right symbol of the 1-card winning combination 50 is not located within the pull-in range, resulting in a missed win. As can be understood from the above explanation, if the stop operation is performed at "left center right" in a game where the reach winning combination 6 is won, the probability of drawing a 1-card winning combination of 50 is 600 (8 x 15 x 5) / 8000. . As mentioned above, in a game where the reach winning combination 6 is won, if the stop operation is performed with "left center right", the total probability of drawing in a 1-card combination becomes 5600/8000 (70%).

FIG. 11(a-2) is another diagram for explaining the attraction probability of each winning combination in a game in which the reach winning combination 6 is won. FIG. 11(a-2) shows the pull-in probability when the stop operation is performed "in the middle of the left and right". As explained using FIG. 11(a-1) above, in a game in which the reach winning combination 6 is won, when the left reel 12 is stopped at symbol positions 6 to 17 (12 frames), the 1-card winning combination 1 , 57 left symbols (replay symbols) are stopped and displayed on the active line.

In the configuration of this embodiment, when the left reel 12 is stopped at symbol positions 6 to 17 (12 frames), the right symbol of the 1-card winning combination 1 is placed on the active line regardless of the stop operation position of the second right stop. It is stopped and displayed (1 card hand 1 becomes tenpai). After that, when the middle third stop is made, the middle symbol of 1-card winning combination 1 is stopped and displayed on the active line regardless of the stop operation position (the 1-card winning combination wins a prize). As can be understood from the above explanation, when the stop operation is performed in "left/right middle" in a game where the reach winning combination 6 is won, the probability of attracting the one-card winning combination 1 is 4800 (12 x 20 x 20)/8000.

As explained using FIG. 11(a-1) above, in a game where the reach symbol 6 is won, when the left reel 12 is stopped at symbol positions 0 to 5, 18, and 19 (8 frames), The left symbols of 1-card combinations 49, 50, and 85 are stopped and displayed on the active line. After that, when the right reel 12 is operated for a second stop at symbol positions 8 to 12 (5 frames), the right symbols (seven symbols) of 1-card winning combinations 49 and 50 are stopped and displayed on the active line (1-card winning combination 49 and 1 card hand 50 is tenpai). When the right symbols of the one-card combinations 49 and 50 are stopped and displayed on the active line, the one-card combination 85 becomes impossible to win. After that, when the middle reel 12 is operated for a third stop at symbol positions 2 to 6 (5 frames), the middle symbol (Bell 1 symbol) of the 1-piece winning combination 49 is stopped and displayed on the active line (the 1-card winning combination 49 is (win a prize). As can be understood from the above explanation, when the stop operation is performed in "left/right middle" in a game where the reach winning combination 6 is won, the probability of attracting the one-card winning combination 49 is 200 (8 x 5 x 5)/8000.

In a game where reach number 6 is won, the left reel 12 is stopped at symbol positions 0 to 5, 18, and 19 (8 frames), and the right reel 12 is stopped at symbol positions 8 to 12 (5 frames). After that, when the third stop operation is performed on the middle reel 12 at symbol positions 0, 1, 7 to 19 (15 frames), the middle symbols of 1 winning combination 50 (Bell 2 to 4 symbols) will stop and be displayed on the active line. (1-card hand 50 wins). As can be understood from the above explanation, when the stop operation is performed in "left/right middle" in a game where the reach winning combination 6 is won, the probability of attracting the one-card winning combination 50 is 600 (8×5×15)/8000.

On the other hand, after the left reel 12 is stopped at symbol positions 0-5, 18, 19 (8 frames), the right reel 12 is stopped at symbol positions 0-7, 13-19 (15 frames). Then, the right symbols (BAR symbols, Bell 1 to 3 symbols) of the 1-card winning combination 85 are stopped and displayed on the active line (the 1-card winning combination 85 becomes tenpai). When the right symbol of the one-card combination 85 is stopped and displayed on the active line, the one-card combinations 49 and 50 become impossible to win. After that, when the third stop operation is performed on the middle reel 12 at symbol positions 0-2, 18, 19, 8-12 (10 frames), the middle symbol (seven symbol) of the 1-piece winning combination 85 is stopped and displayed on the active line. (1-card hand 85 wins). On the other hand, when the right reel 12 is operated for a third stop at symbol positions 3 to 7 and 13 to 17 (10 frames), the middle symbol of the 1-card winning combination 85 is not located within the pull-in range, resulting in a missed win. As can be understood from the above explanation, when the stop operation is performed in "left/right middle" in a game where the reach winning combination 6 is won, the probability of attracting the one-card winning combination 85 is 1200 (8×15×10)/8000. As mentioned above, in a game in which the reach winning combination 6 is won, if the stop operation is performed in "left/right middle", the total probability of attracting a single winning combination becomes 6800/8000 (85%).

FIG. 11(b-1) is a diagram for explaining the attraction probability of each winning combination in a game in which the reach winning combination 7 is won. As described above, the reach mark 7 is a winning area that produces the difference value XJ. FIG. 11(b-1) shows the pull-in probability when the stop operation is performed at "left center right". As described above, in a game where the reach winning combination 7 is won, if the stop operation is performed with "left middle right", any one of the 1-card winning combinations can win (see FIG. 10(a)). Specifically, in a game where the reach symbol 7 is won, if the left first stop is made, the left reel 12 is stopped by symbol number priority control. In the above case, depending on the stop operation position of the left reel 12, the left symbols of 1-piece combinations 1, 84, and 89 (replay symbols) or the left symbols of 1-piece combination 90 (Bell 1 symbol, Bell 2 symbol) are on the active line. will stop appearing.

For example, as shown in Fig. 11 (b-1), when the left reel 12 is stopped at symbol positions 6 to 17 (12 frames), the left symbols of 1-copy combinations 1, 84, and 89 are stopped and displayed on the active line. be done. When the left symbols of the one-card combinations 1, 84, and 89 are stopped and displayed on the active line, the one-card combination 90 whose left symbol is a bell symbol becomes impossible to win. In a game in which the reach symbol 7 is won, if the middle second stop is made after the left first stop, the middle reel 12 is stopped by payout number priority control. In the above configuration, when the left reel 12 is stopped at symbol positions 6 to 17 (12 frames), one of the 1-card combinations 1, 84, and 89 will be played depending on the symbol position where the middle 2nd stop operation was performed. The middle symbol can be stopped and displayed on the active line.

Specifically, in a game where reach number 7 is won, the left reel 12 is stopped at symbol positions 6 to 17 (12 frames), and the middle reel 12 is stopped for a second time at symbol positions 5 to 7 (3 frames). When operated, the middle symbol (cherry symbol) of the winning combination 1 is stopped and displayed on the active line of the middle reel 12. When the left symbol and middle symbol of the 1-card combination 1 are stopped and displayed on the active line, the 1-card combination 1 wins regardless of the stop operation position of the right reel 12. As can be understood from the above explanation, if the stop operation is performed at "left center right" in a game where the reach winning combination 7 is won, the probability of drawing a 1-card winning combination 1 is 720 (12 x 3 x 20) / 8000. .

In a game where reach number 7 is won, the left reel 12 is stopped at symbol positions 6 to 17 (12 frames), and the middle reel 12 is stopped at symbol positions 0 to 4, 11 to 19 (14 frames). Then, the middle symbol (replay symbol) of the one-card winning combination 84 is stopped and displayed on the active line of the middle reel 12. When the left and middle symbols of the 1-card combination 84 are stopped and displayed on the active line, when the right reel 12 is stopped at symbol positions 8 to 12 (5 frames), the 1-card combination 84 wins. On the other hand, when the right reel 12 is stopped at symbol positions 0 to 7, 13 to 19 (15 symbols), the right symbol (seven symbol) of the 1-card winning combination 84 is not located in the pull-in range, so a missed winning occurs. As can be understood from the above explanation, when the stop operation is performed at "left center right" in a game where the reach winning combination 7 is won, the probability of drawing in the 1-card winning combination 84 is 840 (12 x 14 x 5) / 8000. .

In a game where reach number 7 is won, when the left reel 12 is stopped at symbol positions 6 to 17 (12 frames) and the middle reel 12 is stopped at symbol positions 8 to 10 (3 frames), The middle symbol (seven symbol) of the one-card winning combination 89 is stopped and displayed on the active line of the middle reel 12. When the left symbol and middle symbol of the 1-card combination 89 are stopped and displayed on the active line, the 1-card combination 89 wins regardless of the stop operation position of the right reel 12. As can be understood from the above explanation, when the stop operation is performed at "left center right" in a game where the reach winning combination 7 is won, the probability of drawing in the 1-card winning combination 89 is 720 (12 x 3 x 20) / 8000. .

In a game where the reach symbol 7 has been won, when the left reel 12 is stopped at symbol positions 0 to 5, 18, 19 (8 frames), the left symbols of the 1-piece winning combination 90 (Bell 1 symbol, Bell 2 symbol) is stopped and displayed on the active line. When the left symbol of the one-card combination 90 is stopped and displayed on the active line, the one-card combinations 1, 84, and 89 become impossible to win. Furthermore, when the left symbol of the 1-card winning combination 90 is stopped and displayed on the active line, the 1-card winning combination 90 wins (does not fail) regardless of the stop operation positions of the middle reel 12 and the right reel 12. As can be understood from the above explanation, if the stop operation is performed at "left center right" in a game where the reach winning combination 7 is won, the probability of drawing in the 1-card winning combination 90 is 3200 (8 x 20 x 20) / 8000. . As mentioned above, in a game in which the reach winning combination 7 is won, if the stop operation is performed with "left center right", the total probability of drawing in a 1-card combination becomes 5480/8000 (68.5%).

FIG. 11(b-2) is another diagram for explaining the attraction probability of each winning combination in a game in which the reach winning combination 7 is won. FIG. 11(b-2) shows the pull-in probability when the stop operation is performed in the "center left/right" position.

As explained using FIG. 11 (b-1) above, in a game in which the reach winning combination 7 is won, when the left reel 12 is stopped at symbol positions 6 to 17 (12 frames), the 1-card winning combination 1 , 84, and 89 left symbols (replay symbols) are stopped and displayed on the active line. In a game where the reach symbol 7 is won, if the left symbols (replay symbols) of the 1-card symbol 1, 84, and 89 are stopped and displayed on the active line, the 1-card symbol is won regardless of the stop operation position of the right second stop. The right symbol of 89 (replay symbol) is stopped and displayed on the active line. After that, when the middle reel 12 is stopped for the third time at symbol positions 0-2, 18, 19, 8-12 (10 frames), the middle symbol (7 symbol) of 1 winning combination 89 is stopped and displayed on the active line. (1-card hand 89 wins). On the other hand, when the middle reel 12 is operated for a third stop at symbol positions 3 to 7 and 13 to 17 (10 frames), the middle symbol of the 1-card winning combination 89 is not located within the pull-in range, resulting in a missed win. As can be understood from the above explanation, when the stop operation is performed in "left/right middle" in a game where the reach winning combination 7 is won, the probability of attracting the one-card winning combination 89 is 2400 (12 x 20 x 10)/8000.

As shown in FIG. 11(b-2), in a game where the reach number 7 is won, when the left reel 12 is stopped at symbol positions 0 to 5, 18, and 19 (8 frames), the right second stop and Regardless of the stop operation position of the middle third stop, the winning combination 90 of one card is won. As can be understood from the above explanation, when the stop operation is performed in "left/right middle" in a game where the reach winning combination 7 is won, the probability of attracting the one-card winning combination 90 is 3200 (8 x 20 x 20)/8000. As mentioned above, in a game in which the reach winning combination 7 is won, if the stop operation is performed in "left/right middle", the total probability of attracting a 1-card combination becomes 5600/8000 (70%).

In the present embodiment described above, in a game in which the reach winning combination 6 is won, if the stop operation is performed with "left center right", the total probability of attracting a 1-card winning combination becomes 70%. On the other hand, in a game where the reach winning combination 6 is won, if the stop operation is performed in "left/right middle", the probability of drawing a one-card winning combination becomes 85%. Furthermore, in a game where the reach winning combination 7 is won, if a stop operation is performed with "left center right", the total probability of drawing in a 1-card combination becomes 68.5%. On the other hand, in a game where the reach winning combination 7 is won, if the stop operation is performed in "left/right middle", the probability of drawing a one-card winning combination becomes 70%. That is, in this embodiment, the difference value XJ becomes a numerical value "0" or more. According to the above configuration, even if the unfavorable pressing order is the same (left-center-right, left-right-center), the probability of attracting a single winning combination changes, so that the effect of improving the interest of the game can be achieved.

FIG. 11(c-1) and FIG. 11(c-2) are diagrams for explaining the configuration for generating the difference value XH. FIG. 11(c-1) shows the winning combinations that are won when the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order (middle 1st, right 1st) in a game in which the reach winning combination 6 is won. As shown in FIG. 11(c-1), when the stop operation is performed in the middle 1st in a game in which the reach winning combination 6 is won, the 1-card winning combination 1 is won regardless of the stop operation position. On the other hand, if the stop operation is performed on the right 1st, plum B6 (13-piece plum combination) will be won regardless of the stop operation position.

FIG. 11(c-2) shows the winning combination that is won when the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order (middle 1st, right 1st) in a game in which the reach winning combination 7 is won. As shown in FIG. 11 (c-2), in the game in which the reach winning combination 7 was won, Plum B6 (13 plum combination) was common when the stop operation was performed on the middle 1st and when the stop operation was performed on the right 1st. will win a prize. According to the above configuration, the difference value XH becomes larger than the numerical value "0". Therefore, compared to, for example, a configuration in which the difference value X (XJ, XH) does not occur, the effect of improving the fun of the game is particularly remarkable.

FIGS. 12(a) to 12(c) are diagrams for explaining specific examples of the difference value Y. FIGS. 12A to 12C show the difference value Y for each gaming state (internal state, non-internal state, bonus operation state). The vertical axis in FIGS. 12(a) to 12(c) indicates the magnitude of the expected acquisition value A. Further, the difference value X (J, H) is shown in FIGS. 12(a) to 12(c). In addition, in this embodiment, for the sake of explanation, the difference value Y in the internal medium state of the gaming state may be described as "difference value Ya", and the difference value Y in the non-internal medium state may be described as "difference value Yb". be. Further, the difference value XJ in the internal medium state of the gaming state may be described as "difference value XJa", and the difference value XJ in the non-internal medium state may be described as "difference value XJb". Similarly, the difference value XH in the internal medium state of the gaming state may be described as "difference value XHa", and the difference value XH in the non-internal medium state may be described as "difference value XHb".

FIG. 12(a) is a diagram for explaining the difference value Ya in the internal medium state among the gaming states. FIG. 12(a) shows each expected acquisition value A (1 to 6) in the internal medium state for each stop operation order.

As mentioned above, in the internal middle state, the left 1st (left middle right, left and right middle) is the unfavorable press order, and among the expected acquisition values A (1, 2) of the unfavorable press order, the expected acquisition value for "left and right middle" is A2 becomes the maximum value. Further, the difference value XJa is approximately "0.0000182" (XJ=A2-A1≈0.0000182). Furthermore, in the internal middle state, the irregular press order (middle 1st, right 1st) is the advantageous press order, and the right 1st (right left middle, right middle left) of each expected acquisition value A (3 to 6) of the advantageous press order. The expected acquisition value A(5, 6) is the maximum value. Further, the difference value XHa is approximately “0.0012818” (XH=A(3,4)−A(5,6)≈0.0012818).

As shown in FIG. 12(a), in the internal middle state, the difference between the expected acquisition value A2 for "left and right middle" and the expected acquisition value A (3, 4) for middle 1st is the difference value Ya. Specifically, the difference value Ya in the internal medium state is approximately "1.1984886" (Y=A(3,4)-A2≈1.1984886). In the internal state, if the stop operation is performed in an advantageous pressing order, the performance of the instruction function of the instruction display 16 will deteriorate.

In the internal state of the present embodiment, the expected acquisition value A differs depending on the order of unfavorable presses, but when a stop operation is performed in an unfavorable press order, the performance related to the instruction function of the instruction display 16 decreases regardless of the order of stop operations. do not. Specifically, in the internal state, the performance of the instruction function of the instruction display 16 is the same regardless of the pressing order. As will be described in detail later, in the internal state, processing related to the instruction function (BB lottery, updating of a specific counter, stock lottery processing, etc.) is executed under common conditions regardless of the type of unfavorable pressing order. In addition, in the internal state of this embodiment, the expected acquisition value A differs depending on the order of presses that are advantageous, but when the stop operation is performed in the order of presses that are advantageous, the performance related to the instruction function of the instruction display 16 depends on the order of the stop operations. It decreases uniformly. Specifically, in the internal state, the performance of the instruction function of the instruction display 16 is the same regardless of the pressing order. As will be described in detail later, in the internal state, a common penalty control is executed regardless of the type of advantageous pressing order.

FIG. 12(b) is a diagram for explaining the difference value Yb in the non-internal state among the gaming states. FIG. 12(b) shows each expected value A (1 to 6) obtained in each stop operation order in the non-internal state. Further, in FIG. 12(b), the difference value Ya in the internal medium state is shown so as to be comparable with the difference value Yb in the non-internal medium state. As will be described in detail later, the difference value Ya is larger than the difference value Yb. That is, when the state shifts from the non-internal medium state to the internal medium state, the difference value Y increases.

In the non-internal state, as in the internal state, the left 1st is the unfavorable pressing order, and the irregular pressing order is the advantageous pressing order. Furthermore, as understood from FIGS. 12(a) and 12(b), the expected acquisition value A1 at "left center right" is common to the internal medium state and the non-internal medium state. Similarly, the expected acquisition value A2 for "left center right" is common to both the internal medium state and the non-internal medium state. In the above configuration, the difference value XJb in the non-internal medium state is the same as the difference value XJa in the internal medium state (XJa=XJb).

On the other hand, the expected value A (3 to 6) obtained in the advantageous press order (irregular press order) is greater in the internal medium state than in the non-internal medium state. Specifically, as explained in FIGS. 10(a) and 10(b) above, in the internal medium state, if a stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order in a game where the batting order plum was won, the correct answer plum (13 pieces) Plum role, 6 plum role) won the prize. However, for some of the batting order plums in which the correct pressing order is irregular, if a prize is won in a non-internal medium state, attraction control is executed in which the correct answer plum does not win a prize.

Specifically, if any of Plum CL (5, 6), Plum CR (5, 6), Plum RL (1, 2), and Plum RC (1, 2) is won in a non-internal state, it will be stopped. Regardless of the order of operations, the reels 12 are stopped by symbol number priority control at the time of the first stop operation. In the above configuration, if the batting order plum wins in the non-internal medium state, even if the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order in the internal medium state, one of the 1-card combinations will win, and the correct plum will not win. . In addition, the winning combination won in a game in which another winning area is won is the same in the non-internal state and the internal state if the stopping operation mode (order, position) is common. Therefore, the expected value A (3 to 6) obtained in the advantageous pressing order is greater in the internal medium state than in the non-internal medium state.

As shown in FIG. 12(b), the expected acquisition value A3 for "middle left/right" and the expected acquisition value A4 for "middle right/left" among the advantageous press orders are approximately "1.9429283" in common. Further, among the advantageous pressing orders, the expected acquisition value A5 for "right left middle" and the expected acquisition value A6 for "right middle left" are approximately "1.9442101" in common. In the above configuration, the difference value Yb in the non-internal medium state is approximately "0.374514", which is smaller than the difference value Ya (≈1.1984886) in the internal medium state. However, the difference value Yb in the non-internal medium state is larger than the above-mentioned specific value Ny "0.1".

In the non-internal state of the present embodiment, the expected acquisition value A differs depending on the order of unfavorable presses, but when a stop operation is performed in an unfavorable press order, the performance related to the instruction function of the instruction display 16 is independent of the order of stop operations. Does not decrease. Specifically, in the non-internal state, the performance of the instruction function of the instruction display 16 is the same regardless of the pressing order. That is, in the non-internal state, processing related to the instruction function (BB lottery, updating of a specific counter, stock lottery processing, etc.) is executed under common conditions regardless of the type of unfavorable press order. Furthermore, in the non-internal state of the present embodiment, the expected acquisition value A differs depending on the order of presses that are advantageous, but when the stop operation is performed in the order of presses that are advantageous, the performance related to the instruction function of the instruction display 16 depends on the order of the stop operation. It decreases uniformly regardless. Specifically, in the non-internal state, the performance of the instruction function of the instruction display 16 is the same regardless of the pressing order. That is, in the non-internal state, a common penalty control is executed regardless of the type of advantageous pressing order.

In this embodiment, the difference value XHb in the non-internal medium state and the difference value XHa in the internal medium state are common. However, the difference value XHb in the non-internal medium state may be different from the difference value XHa in the internal medium state. Similarly, a configuration may be adopted in which the difference value XJb in the non-internal medium state and the difference value XJa in the internal medium state are different. Note that for the sake of explanation below, the maximum value of each expected acquisition value A (1 to 6) in the non-internal medium state may be referred to as "expected acquisition value Amax." The expected acquisition value Amax in this embodiment is the expected acquisition value A(5, 6), as shown in FIG. 12(b).

FIG. 12(c) is a diagram for explaining the difference value Y in the bonus operation state among the gaming states. FIG. 12(c) shows each expected acquisition value A (1 to 6) in each stop operation order in the bonus operating state.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12(c), in the bonus activation state, the expected acquisition value A becomes "1.9442139" regardless of the order of the stop operations. Therefore, the difference value Y is a numerical value of "0", and the difference value X (XJ, XH) is a numerical value of "0". However, in the bonus operation state, each expected acquisition value A in each stop operation order may be different. For example, in the bonus operation state, depending on the order of the stop operations, the expected acquisition value A may have a difference of less than the above-mentioned predetermined value Nx (0.01). Furthermore, a unilaterally advantageous stop operation order may be provided even in the bonus operating state. However, in the above configuration, from the viewpoint of suppressing the inconvenience of confusion for the player, it is preferable that the unilaterally advantageous stop operation order be common to each gaming state.

FIG. 12(c) shows the expected acquisition value Amax in the non-internal medium state described in FIG. 12(b) above. In this embodiment, each expected acquisition value A (1 to 6) in each stop operation order in the bonus activation state is larger than the expected acquisition value Amax in the non-internal medium state. Specifically, the expected acquisition value A in the bonus activation state is larger than the expected acquisition value Amax in the non-internal medium state by about "0.0000038" ("Z" in the figure). In addition, if a configuration is adopted in which each expected acquisition value A in each stop operation order is different in the bonus operation state, the minimum expected acquisition value A among the respective expected acquisition values A is the expected acquisition value Amax in the non-internal medium state. Larger configurations are preferred.

By the way, there are players who, in a winning game of the RBB combination in the non-internal medium state, stop display (touch) the symbol combination of the RBB combination on the active line and move it to the bonus activation state, and a player who displays the symbol combination of the RBB combination on the active line to move to the bonus activation state. There is a player who does not stop and display the combination on the active line and moves to the internal medium state. Assume a configuration in which each expected acquisition value A (1 to 6) in each stop operation order in the bonus activation state is smaller than the expected acquisition value Amax in the non-internal medium state (hereinafter referred to as a "comparative example"). In the above comparison example, there is a situation in which a player who is allowed to enter the bonus activation state is likely to be at a significant disadvantage than a player who is allowed to enter the internal medium state. That is, in the comparative example, inconveniences that impair the fairness of the game are likely to occur. In the configuration of this embodiment, the expected acquisition value A in the bonus operating state is larger than the expected acquisition value Amax in the non-internal medium state, so there is an advantage that the above-mentioned disadvantages are suppressed.

In the bonus operation state of this embodiment, when a stop operation is performed on the left 1st, the performance of the instruction function of the instruction display 16 does not deteriorate regardless of the order of the stop operations. Specifically, in the bonus operating state, the performance related to the instruction function of the instruction display 16 is the same between "left middle right" and "left middle right". That is, in the bonus operation state, processing related to the instruction function (BB lottery, updating of a specific counter, stock lottery processing, etc.) is executed under common conditions for "left middle right" and "left right middle". Furthermore, in the bonus operation state of the present embodiment, when the stop operations are performed in an irregular press order, the performance of the instruction function of the instruction display 16 uniformly decreases regardless of the order of the stop operations. Specifically, in the bonus operating state, the performance of the instruction function of the instruction display 16 is the same regardless of the irregular pressing order. That is, in the bonus operating state, a common penalty control is executed regardless of the type of irregular press order.

FIG. 13(a) is a diagram for explaining the transition of the ball output state of the main CPU 301. As shown in FIG. 13(a), the main CPU 301 controls the game in either the non-advantageous section or the advantageous section.

The non-advantageous section includes processing related to the instruction function (processing related to the transition of the ball output state (update processing, lottery processing), processing for executing instructions on the instruction display 16, except for the processing at the time of transition to the advantageous section, which will be described later). etc.) are not executed at all. That is, the non-advantageous section is a section in which instructions on the instruction display 16 are not executed. On the other hand, the advantageous section is a section in which processing related to the instruction function is executed. That is, this is an interval in which instructions on the instruction display 16 can be executed.

In this embodiment, a ball release state flag indicating the current ball release state is stored in the main RAM 303. In each game, the main CPU 301 transmits a ball release state command indicating a ball release state flag to the sub CPU 412. The sub CPU 412 determines the performance according to the ball release state indicated by the ball release state command.

In principle, the advantageous section ends when the non-advantageous section is determined by a transition lottery to be described later. However, the advantageous section may end at other times. Specifically, the advantageous section ends when the number of games played in the advantageous section reaches 1500 times. Further, the advantageous section ends when the net increase in medals since the start of the increase reaches 2400 medals. If any of the above-mentioned triggers is established, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated regardless of the current ball payout state and gaming state.

In this embodiment, the above-mentioned net increase in number of sheets is counted by the MY counter. Further, the number of games played in an advantageous section is counted by an advantageous section counter. Each of the above counters is provided in the main RAM 303, for example. Note that the advantageous section may be configured to end when the number of games played in the advantageous section reaches 3000 times. Further, as the trigger for forcibly ending the advantageous section, only the trigger when the MY counter reaches the numerical value "2400" may be adopted.

As shown in FIG. 13(a), in the advantageous section, it is possible to shift to each ball release state including the normal state, pullback state, heaven chance state, heaven state, super heaven state, BB state, and EDBB state. Hereinafter, among the respective ball dispensing states, the ball dispensing state (so-called "AT state") in which the instruction on the instruction display 16 is executed may be collectively referred to as the "instruction period." Further, a ball dispensing state in which an instruction on the instruction display 16 is not executed may be collectively referred to as a "non-instruction period." In this embodiment, the BB state and the EDBB state are instruction periods, and the other ball release states are non-instruction periods.

When a predetermined winning area is won in the non-advantageous section, the ball transitions to a specific ball-out state (pull-back state, heavenly chance state, BB state) among the ball-out states in the advantageous section. In this embodiment, when a winning area other than "Replay 1" and "RBB" (see FIG. 5 above) is won, the non-advantageous section is shifted to the advantageous section. In a game that moves from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section, processing at the time of transition to an advantageous section is executed. In addition, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which an advantageous section is always started in a game in which the above-mentioned winning area is won. However, a predetermined lottery may be executed when the winning area is won, and if the winning area is won, the advantageous section is started, and if the lottery is a loss, the non-advantageous section is maintained.

The contents of the process when moving to an advantageous section change depending on the gaming state (non-internal state, internal state). Specifically, as described above, except immediately after the setting value is changed (immediately after the gaming hall opens), the game is generally executed in the internal mode state. Therefore, the processing at the time of transition to an advantageous section is, in principle, executed in the internal state. In addition, when the processing at the time of transition to an advantageous section is executed in a game in which the RBB combination (overlapping combinations 1 to 14) is won, the processing at the time of transition to the advantageous section becomes the content of the internal medium state. In addition, in this embodiment, the processing at the time of transition to an advantageous section is not executed in the bonus operating state. However, a configuration may also be adopted in which a winning area is provided with a common probability of winning in the non-internal state and the bonus operating state, and when the winning area is won in the bonus operating state, the advantageous section transition process is executed.

In the processing when moving to an advantageous section in the internal medium state, a special lottery is executed. In the above special lottery, the transition to the BB state is determined with a probability of about 27.3% when Cherry 1 or Cherry 2 (overlapping combination 1 or overlapping combination 2) is won. In addition, in the special lottery, if the reach mark (1 to 7) is won, a transition to the BB state is determined with a 100% probability. In the special lottery, the transition to the BB state is determined with a probability of about 0.1% when a prize other than the cherry (1, 2) or the reach number (1 to 7) is won. It should be noted that in the special lottery, if the winning combination (1 to 7) is won, a configuration may be adopted in which the state shifts to the premium BB state in a modification described later. When the transition to the BB state is determined in the special lottery, the transition to the BB state starts from the next game (the first game in the advantageous section) (trigger (A) in FIG. 13(a)).

In addition, in the first game in the BB state, immediately after the start operation, an effect is executed to notify that the game will shift to the BB state. Furthermore, in the first game in the BB state, a pseudo game is executed before the stop operation becomes possible (before each reel 12 rotates steadily). As a configuration for executing the pseudo game, for example, the configuration described in Japanese Patent No. 6867053 may be adopted. In the above pseudo game, three seven symbols are displayed on any line, and then each reel 12 rotates steadily. On the other hand, in the special lottery, if the transition to the BB state is not determined, then the transition to the heavenly chance state occurs (trigger (B) in FIG. 13(a)).

In the processing at the time of transition to an advantageous section in the non-internal state, a special lottery is not executed. A specific example in which the processing at the time of transition to an advantageous section is executed in a non-internal medium state is that in a non-internal medium state immediately after the setting value is changed, before the RBB combination (duplicate combinations 1 to 4) is won, the advantageous period transition process is executed. This is assumed to be the case when migration processing is executed. When the advantageous section transition process is executed in the non-internal state, in principle, the advantageous section shifts to the pullback state (trigger (C) in FIG. 13(a)).

As can be understood from the above explanation, in this embodiment, the player is more advantageous when the process when moving to an advantageous section is executed in the internal medium state rather than when the process when moving to an advantageous period is executed in the non-internal medium state. . Let us assume a comparative example in which the player would be more advantageous if the processing at the time of transition to an advantageous section was executed in the non-internal medium state, rather than the process at the time of transition to an advantageous period in the internal medium state. As described above, immediately after the setting value is changed (immediately after the game hall opens), the game enters the non-internal state. Therefore, in the above-mentioned comparison example, the situation immediately after the opening of the gaming hall becomes excessively advantageous, which tends to cause the inconvenience that the gambling nature of the players is excessively stimulated. According to the configuration of this embodiment, there is an advantage that the above-mentioned disadvantages are suppressed.

However, in the processing at the time of transition to an advantageous section in the non-internal medium state, a transition to the BB state may be determined. Specifically, when a reach symbol is won in a non-advantageous section of a non-internal medium state, a transition to a BB state is determined in an advantageous section transition process. Note that a configuration may also be adopted in which a transition to the normal state can be determined in the process when the non-internal state transitions to an advantageous section. In the above configuration, it is preferable that when transitioning from the non-advantageous section to the normal state, a high probability transition lottery, which will be described later, is executed in the advantageous section transition process.

In each game in the heavenly chance state, a special lottery is executed. In the special lottery, whether or not to shift to the BB state is determined by a lottery. Although the details will be described later, the special lottery is realized by various processes including the judgment condition lottery process executed at the third stop of the previous game and the BB judgment process executed at the start operation of the current game. (See FIG. 15(a) described below). Further, in the special lottery, transition to the BB state is determined with a higher probability than in the normal lottery (described later) that is executed in the pullback state and the normal state.

If you win the BB state in the heaven chance state, it is easier to transition to the heaven state after the BB state ends compared to winning the BB state in the pullback state or normal state (heaven state is more likely to be determined by the transition lottery described below). . That is, the heaven chance state is a ball-out state that provides a chance to transition to the heaven state. When the transition to the BB state is determined in the heavenly chance state, the transition to the BB state starts from the next game (trigger (D) in FIG. 13).

The heavenly chance state ends when 98 games have been played without determining the transition to the BB state. In the above case, the state shifts from the heavenly chance state to the pullback state (trigger (E) in FIG. 13(a)). Specifically, at the start of the heaven chance state, the initial value "98" is stored in the heaven chance counter. The heaven chance counter described above is provided in the main RAM 303, for example. In each game in the heaven chance state, the heaven chance counter is decremented by a numerical value of "1", and when it reaches the numerical value "0", it shifts to the pullback state from the next game.

In each game in the pullback state, a normal lottery is executed. In the normal lottery, similarly to the special lottery in the heavenly chance state, whether or not to shift to the BB state is determined by a lottery. When a transition to the BB state is determined in the normal lottery, the game will transition to the BB state from the next game (trigger (F) in FIG. 13(a)). In this embodiment, transition to the BB state is more likely to be determined in the special lottery than in the normal lottery. For example, if a cherry (1, 2) is won, a transition to the BB state is determined with a probability of about 27.3% in the special lottery. On the other hand, if the cherry (1, 2) is won, the transition to the BB state is determined with an average probability of about 2.4% in the normal lottery.

By the way, since the non-advantageous period is a period in which instructions on the instruction display 16 are not executed, some players may be prone to cancel the game when the game shifts to the non-advantageous period. In consideration of the above circumstances, the present embodiment is configured such that when a cherry is won in a non-advantageous section, the transition to the BB state is easier than when a cherry is won in a normal state of an advantageous section. Specifically, the configuration is such that the transition to the BB state is more easily determined in the special lottery in the non-advantageous section than in the regular lottery in the normal state. According to the present embodiment described above, there is an advantage that the inconvenience that the game is likely to be canceled in the non-advantageous period is suppressed.

In each game in the pullback state, a falling lottery is executed. In the above fall lottery, it is determined whether or not to shift to the normal state. When the transition to the normal state is determined in the falling lottery, the transition to the normal state starts from the next game (trigger (G) in FIG. 13(a)). In the fall lottery, for example, transition to the normal state is determined with a probability of approximately 1/96.3. However, if the pullback state continues for a predetermined number of times (332 or 234 times) without determining the transition to the normal state in the falling lottery, the transition to the BB state will occur (the trigger in Figure 13 (a) (H)).

For example, when the heaven chance state is started, the initial value "332" is set in the pullback ceiling counter. The above-mentioned pullback ceiling counter is provided in the main RAM 303, and is decremented by 1 in each game in the heaven chance state and the pullback state. Note that in the heavenly chance state, the above-mentioned falling lottery is not executed. In the above configuration, the pullback ceiling counter is decremented to the numerical value "234" at the time when the heaven chance state (98 games) ends and the pullback state starts. Therefore, if the pull-back state continues 234 times without determining the transition to the normal state in the falling lottery, the state then shifts to the BB state.

As mentioned above, there is a case where there is a direct transition from the non-advantageous section to the pullback state. In the above case, the pullback state is started without going through the heavenly chance state. Therefore, at the time when the pullback state is started, the pullback ceiling counter remains at the initial value "332". In the above case, if the pullback state continues 332 times without determining the transition to the normal state in the falling lottery, the state then shifts to the BB state. In the above configuration, in the pullback state that transitioned through the heavenly chance state, compared to the pullback state that transitioned without going through the heavenly chance state, it takes a falling lottery to return to the normal state by the time the pullback ceiling counter reaches the value "0". It is difficult to determine the transition of

In the pullback state, a high probability transition lottery is executed similarly to the normal state described below. If you win the high probability transition lottery, the high probability period will start. In the normal state of the high probability period, transition to the BB state is more likely to be determined in the normal lottery than in a period that is not a high probability period (hereinafter referred to as "low probability period"). Specifically, in a game in which a winning area (batting order plum, etc.) other than Cherry and Replay (1, 2) is won, a high probability transition lottery is executed. Furthermore, in a game in which a bell is won, a transition to a high probability period is determined with a higher probability than in a game in which other winning areas are won. In addition, in a game in which the reach winning combination (1 to 7) is won, the transition to the BB state is determined, so the high probability transition lottery is not executed. The above-described high probability transition lottery is executed in the stop processing described later.

Specifically, when winning the high probability transition lottery, an initial value is set in the high probability guarantee counter and a high probability period is started. The high probability guarantee counter is provided in the main RAM 303, for example. Further, the initial value of the high probability guarantee counter is determined by lottery. In each game in the high probability period, the high probability guarantee counter is decremented by a value of "1". In the high probability period after the high probability guaranteed counter is decremented to the value "0", a high probability fall lottery is executed. In the high-probability fall lottery, whether or not to end the high-probability period (or not to transition to the low-probability period) is determined by lottery. When it is determined to end the high probability period, the next game starts with a low probability period. The above-described high-probability fall lottery is executed in the start processing described later, regardless of the winning area.

In the normal state, as in the pullback state, a normal lottery is executed in each game. Note that the aspect of the effect execution means (liquid crystal display device 30, etc.) is the same in the normal state and the pulled back state. Further, in the pullback state, it is not reported that the transition to the normal state has been determined by the falling lottery. Therefore, the player cannot determine whether the current state of balls being put out is a normal state or a withdrawn state from the aspect of the performance execution means. However, a configuration may be adopted in which the performance frequency is different between the normal state and the pulled back state. Furthermore, an effect may be provided that is not executed in the normal state but is executed in the pulled back state.

When a transition to the BB state is determined by the normal lottery in the normal state, a pseudo game is executed in the next game and the transition to the BB state is made (trigger (I) in FIG. 13(a)). Furthermore, in each game in the normal state, a high probability transfer lottery is executed as in the above-mentioned pullback state. In the normal state of the high probability period, transition to the BB state is more likely to be determined in the normal lottery than in the low probability period. In the high probability period of the normal state, a high probability fall lottery is executed as in the high probability period of the pullback state.

When the normal state is started, the initial value "666" is set in the BB ceiling counter. In each game in the normal state, the BB ceiling counter is decremented by a value of "1". When the BB ceiling counter is decremented to the numerical value "0", the next game will transition to the BB state (trigger (J) in FIG. 13(a)).

In this embodiment, the maximum number of games from the end of the BB state to the transition to the normal state via the heavenly chance state and the pullback state is 332. In the above configuration, after the previous BB state ends and before the 998th game is played, the BB ceiling counter (initial value is "666") is decremented to the numerical value "0", and the transition to the new BB state is made. do. Furthermore, the maximum number of games from the transition from the non-advantageous section to the heaven chance state or the pullback state until the transition to the normal state is 332. In the above configuration, after the game shifts from the non-advantageous section to the heavenly chance state or the pullback state, the BB ceiling counter is decremented to the numerical value "0" before the 998th game is executed, and the game shifts to the BB state.

The BB state is an instruction period, and instructions on the instruction display 16 are executed. That is, in the BB state, a stop operation order advantageous to the player is instructed. Specifically, in the BB state, when the above-mentioned specific group (excluding the one-card winning combination) is won, a stop operation order is instructed that makes it possible to win a 6-card plum combination or a 13-card plum combination. For example, in the BB state, if a batting order plum is won, the correct pressing order corresponding to the batting order plum is indicated. Furthermore, in the BB state, when the reach winning combination 1 is won, a stop operation order for winning the 13-piece plum combination is instructed (see FIG. 15, which will be described later).

As will be described in detail later, when the transition to the BB state is determined, a stock lottery process is executed. In addition, stock lottery processing is also executed in each game in the BB state. In the stock lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not to give 1G continuous stock and Super Heaven stock. When 1G continuous stock is provided, the 1G continuous stock counter is added. Furthermore, when super heaven stock is given, the super heaven stock counter is added.

The BB state ends after a predetermined number of games. The BB state of this embodiment ends after 50 games. When the BB state ends, if the 1G continuous stock counter is greater than or equal to the value "1", the value "1" is subtracted from the 1G continuous stock counter, a pseudo game is executed in the next game, and a new BB state is started. (Trigger (K) in FIG. 13(a)). That is, the BB state continues until the 1G continuous stock counter reaches the value "0".

At the time when the BB state ends, if the 1G continuous stock counter has a value of "0", it is determined whether the super heaven stock counter has a value of "1" or more. When the super heaven stock counter is greater than or equal to the value "1", the value "1" is subtracted from the super heaven stock counter, and the super heaven state is started from the next game (trigger (L) in FIG. 13(a)). At the time when the BB state ends, if both the 1G continuous stock counter and the super heaven stock counter are numerically "0", a transition lottery is executed.

FIG. 13(b) is a conceptual diagram of the transition lottery table. The main CPU 301 uses the transition lottery table in the transition lottery to determine the next ball payout state to be transitioned to. Specifically, one of the non-advantageous section, the heavenly chance state, and the heavenly state is determined in the transition lottery. As shown in FIG. 13(b), in the transition lottery table, each lottery value for each ball release state is provided for each consecutive chance mode. The continuous mode includes "HI", "MID", and "LOW". Further, the transition to the heaven state is likely to be determined in the order of continuous mode of "HI", "MID", and "LOW".

When the transition to the BB state is determined, the main CPU 301 determines one of the continuous winning modes based on the current ball release state and winning area. Specifically, in the heaven chance state, the heaven state, and the super heaven state, the advantageous continuous chance mode is more likely to be determined than in other ball release states (such as the normal state). In the above configuration, in the heaven chance state, the heaven state, and the super heaven state, it is easier to shift to the heaven state after the BB state ends, compared to other ball release states. Note that the above-described process for determining the continuous mode and the transition lottery will not be disadvantageous due to the main penalty control described below.

The explanation returns to FIG. 13(a). When the non-advantageous section is determined by the transition lottery, the process shifts to the non-advantageous section after the BB state ends (trigger (M) in FIG. 13(a)). When the heaven chance state is determined by the transition lottery, the state shifts to the heaven chance state after the BB state ends (trigger (N) in FIG. 13(a)). When the heaven state is determined by the transition lottery, the state shifts to the heaven state after the BB state ends (trigger (O) in FIG. 13(a)).

In each game in the heaven state, similarly to the heaven chance state, whether or not to shift to the BB state is determined by a special lottery. However, in each game in the heaven state, a transition to the BB state may be more easily determined than in each game in the heaven chance state. When a transition to the BB state is determined in the heaven state, a pseudo game is executed in the next game and the transition to the BB state is made (trigger (P) in FIG. 13(a)).

Further, when the heaven state is started, an initial value "98" is set in the heaven ceiling counter. In each game in the heaven state, the heaven ceiling counter is decremented by a numerical value of "1", and when it reaches the numerical value of "0", it shifts to the BB state (trigger (Q) in FIG. 13(a)). In the heaven state described above, even if the transition to the BB state is not determined by a special lottery, it is possible to transition to the BB state in 98 games.

In each game in the super heaven state, similarly to the heaven state and the heaven chance state, whether or not to shift to the BB state is determined by a special lottery. However, in each game in the super heaven state, the transition to the BB state may be more easily determined than in each game in the heaven state and the heaven chance state. When a transition to the BB state is determined in the super heaven state, a pseudo game is executed in the next game and the transition to the BB state is made (trigger (R) in FIG. 13(a)).

Further, when the super heaven state is started, an initial value "32" is set in the super heaven ceiling counter. In each game in the super heaven state, the super heaven ceiling counter is decremented by a numerical value of "1", and when it reaches the numerical value of "0", it shifts to the BB state (trigger (S) in FIG. 13(a)). In the above super heaven state, even if the transition to the BB state is not determined by lottery, it is possible to transition to the BB state in 32 games.

In this embodiment, when transitioning from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section, an initial value "1350" is set to the advantageous section ceiling counter. The above advantageous section ceiling counter is decremented by a value of "1" in each game in each ball payout state (BB state, super heaven state, heaven state, heaven chance state, pullback state, and normal state) in the advantageous section. However, as will be described in detail later, in a game where a stop operation is performed in an irregular press order during a non-instruction period in an advantageous section, the advantageous section ceiling counter is not subtracted (a penalty is given).

When the advantageous section ceiling counter reaches the numerical value "0" in the normal state, pullback state, or heavenly chance state among the advantageous sections, a pseudo game is executed in the next game and the transition to the BB state occurs (the trigger in Fig. 13 (a) X)). As described above, when the advantageous section starts, the initial value "1500" is set in the advantageous section counter, and the value "1" is subtracted from the advantageous section counter in each game in the advantageous section. In the above configuration, if the stop operation is not performed in an irregular press order during the non-instruction period (if no penalty is given), in a game where the advantageous section ceiling counter reaches the numerical value "0", the advantageous section counter reaches the numerical value "150". is subtracted up to. In other words, in this embodiment, when the remaining number of games in the advantageous section becomes 150 or less, it is possible to shift to the BB state.

If the advantageous section ceiling counter reaches the numerical value "0" and shifts to the BB state, the advantageous section counter becomes the numerical value "100" or less at the time when the BB state (50 games) ends. Furthermore, in this embodiment, if the advantageous section counter is less than or equal to the numerical value "100" at the time when the BB state ends, the transition to the non-advantageous section is determined without executing the above-mentioned transition lottery (see FIG. 13(a)). Opportunity (Y)). Therefore, if the advantageous section ceiling counter reaches the numerical value "0" and shifts to the BB state, the vehicle shifts to the non-advantageous section after the BB state ends.

When the advantageous section ceiling counter reaches the numerical value "0" in the heaven state or super heaven state among the advantageous sections, a pseudo game is executed in the next game and the state shifts to the EDBB state (trigger (Z) in FIG. 13(a)). . In other words, the present embodiment described above can shift to the EDBB state when the remaining number of games in the advantageous section becomes 150 or less. In addition, in the pseudo game when the EDD state starts, the symbol combination "BAR-BAR-BAR" is displayed.

The EDBB state is an instruction period, and instructions on the instruction display 16 are executed. Therefore, in the EDBB state, as in the BB state, when a specific group (see FIG. 8) wins, a stop operation order is instructed that allows a nine-card combination to be won. The EDBB state ends when the advantageous section counter reaches the value "0". That is, the trigger for ending the EDBB state is the trigger for forcibly ending the advantageous section. Therefore, when the EDBB state ends, a transition is made to the non-advantageous section (trigger (T) in FIG. 13(a)).

For example, assume that the advantageous section ceiling counter reaches the numerical value "0" in the heaven state and the state shifts to the EDBB state. In the above case, in principle, the advantageous section counter is the value "150" at the start of the EDBB state. Therefore, the EDBB state continues for 150 games.

However, as will be described in detail later, penalty control (main penalty control, sub-penalty control) may be executed in the advantageous section. In a game in which the above penalty control is executed, updating processing of various counters including the advantageous section ceiling counter is omitted (see FIG. 18(b-2) described later). The above penalty control can also be said to substantially extend the number of games required to subtract the advantageous section ceiling counter to the numerical value "0". That is, when the penalty control is executed, the number of games played until the state shifts to the EDBB state is extended.

In this embodiment, the process of updating the advantageous section counter and the MY counter is executed regardless of whether penalty control is performed. In the above configuration, when the penalty control is executed, the number of remaining games in the advantageous section at the time of transition to the EDBB state is reduced compared to the case where the penalty control is not executed. That is, when penalty control is executed, the number of games played in the EDBB state is substantially reduced.

The above penalty control is executed when the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order during the non-instruction period. In consideration of the above circumstances, the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute irregular press notification when a stop operation is performed in an irregular press order. According to the above configuration, the irregular press notification indicates to the player that penalty control has been executed.

FIG. 13(c) is a diagram for explaining the presence or absence of penalty control and the presence or absence of abnormal press notification in each ball release state. As shown in FIG. 13(c), in the non-instruction period (normal state, etc.) of the advantageous section, if the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order, irregular press notification is executed and penalty control is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 13(c), in the designated period (BB state, etc.) of the advantageous section, even if the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order, irregular press notification is not executed and penalty control is not executed.

Specifically, when a specific group (batting order plum, etc.) is won during the instruction period, an instruction for the stop operation order is executed on the instruction display 16. In this embodiment, penalty control is not executed if the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order according to the instructions on the instruction display 16. Further, in a game where the order of stop operations is instructed by the instruction display 16, even if the stop operations are performed in a press order that does not follow the instructions (including an irregular press order), penalty control will not be executed. Further, in a game in which a specific group does not win during the instruction period (a game in which the instruction is not executed), even if the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order, penalty control is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 13(c), penalty control is not executed in the non-advantageous section. Specifically, in a game in which the processing at the time of transition to an advantageous section is not executed in a non-advantageous section, no processing related to the instruction function of the instruction display 16 is executed as described above (all parameters are not updated from their initial values). . Furthermore, in a game where processing is executed when moving to an advantageous section in a non-advantageous section, the process when moving to an advantageous section is the same whether the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order or the case where the left first stop operation is performed. However, if the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order in a non-advantageous section, an irregular press notification will be executed.

Assume a comparative example in which irregular press notification is executed during the non-instruction period of the advantageous section, and irregular press notification is not executed during the non-advantageous section. In the above comparison example, in the period in which the instruction on the instruction display 16 is not executed, there are provided a period in which irregular press notification is executed and a period in which it is not executed. Therefore, some players may be confused as to whether or not penalty control will be executed when the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order during the non-instruction period. In this embodiment, since the irregular press notification is executed even in the non-advantageous section, there is an advantage that the above-mentioned inconvenience is suppressed compared to, for example, a comparative example.

FIGS. 14(a) and 14(b) are conceptual diagrams of each instruction determination table (A, B). In each game, the main CPU 301 determines an instruction number using an instruction determination table, and displays instruction information (“01” to “04”) corresponding to the instruction number on the instruction display 16. Further, the main CPU 301 transmits a command (second command described later) indicating the instruction number determined for each game to the sub control board 400 (sub CPU 412).

Each instruction determination table includes an instruction determination table A (FIG. 14(a)) and an instruction determination table B (FIG. 14(b)). The instruction determination table A is used to determine the instruction number for each game during the non-instruction period (normal state, etc.). Further, the instruction determination table B is used to determine the instruction number of each game in the instruction period (BB state, etc.). As shown in FIG. 14, each instruction determination table is configured to include each instruction number for each winning area.

As shown in FIG. 14(a), the instruction number "99" is determined regardless of which winning area wins during the non-instruction period. When the instruction number "99" is determined, the instruction display 16 does not display instruction information. Specifically, when the instruction number "99" is determined, the instruction display 16 displays the number "0" during the period in which instruction information is displayed. According to the above configuration, the stop operation mode is not instructed by the instruction display 16 during the non-instruction period.

As shown in FIG. 14(b), if Plum LC (1, 2) is won in each game during the instruction period, the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number "01". When the instruction number "01" is determined, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display the number "1" (hereinafter referred to as "instruction information "1") as instruction information. As described above, when Plum LC (1, 2) is won, the correct order for pressing the correct plums is "left, center, right." In the above configuration, in a game where the instruction information "1" is displayed, if the stop operation is performed in the "left-center-right" order, it is more advantageous than if the stop operation is performed in any other order. Therefore, when the instruction information "1" is displayed on the instruction display 16, the player performs the stop operation in the order of "left center right." In other words, the above configuration can be said to instruct the player to perform the stop operations in the order of "left, center, right" by displaying the instruction information "1".

As shown in FIG. 14(b), in each game during the instruction period, if Plum LR (1, 2) is won, the main CPU 301 determines instruction number "02". When the instruction number "02" is determined, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display the number "2" (hereinafter referred to as "instruction information "2") as instruction information. As described above, when plum LR (1, 2) is won, the correct pressing order of the correct plums is "left, right, middle." In the above configuration, in a game where instruction information "2" is displayed, if the stop operation is performed in the order of "left/right middle", it is more advantageous than if the stop operation is performed in any other order. Therefore, when the instruction information "2" is displayed on the instruction display 16, the player performs the stop operation in the order of "left/right". In other words, the above configuration can also be said to instruct the player to perform the stop operations in the order of "left and right" by displaying the instruction information "2".

As shown in FIG. 14(b), in each game during the instruction period, when Plum L (1, 2) is won, the main CPU 301 executes the instruction number "01" is determined, and the number "1" (instruction information "1") is displayed on the instruction display 16 as instruction information. As mentioned above, if Plum L (1, 2) is won, if you perform the stop operation in the left 1st position (including the pressing order of "left middle right"), the correct plum will win, which is more advantageous than if you perform the stop operation in an irregular pressing order. Become. In the present embodiment, in the game during the instruction period in which Plum L (1, 2) is won, instruction information "1" is displayed and the stop operation order of "left center right" is instructed. That is, in the game during the instruction period in which Plum L (1, 2) is won, a stop operation order advantageous to the player is instructed.

As shown in FIG. 14(b), in each game during the instruction period, when Plum L (3, 4) is won, the main CPU 301 executes the instruction number "02" is determined, and the number "2" (instruction information "2") is displayed on the instruction display 16 as instruction information. As mentioned above, if Plum L (3, 4) is won, if you perform the stop operation in the left 1st position (including the pressing order of "left and right middle"), the correct plum will win the prize, which will be more advantageous than if you perform the stop operation in an irregular pressing order. . In this embodiment, in the game during the instruction period in which Plum L (3, 4) is won, instruction information "2" is displayed, and the stop operation order of "left and right" is instructed. That is, in the game during the instruction period in which Plum L (3, 4) is won, a stop operation order advantageous to the player is instructed.

As shown in FIG. 14(b), if Plum CL (1 to 4) is won in each game during the instruction period, the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number "03". When the instruction number "03" is determined, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display the number "3" (hereinafter referred to as "instruction information "3") as instruction information. As described above, when Plum CL (1 to 4) is won, the correct order of pressing of the correct plums is "middle, left, right." In the above configuration, in a game where the instruction information "3" is displayed, if the stop operation is performed in the order of "middle left/right", it is more advantageous than if the stop operation is performed in any other order. Therefore, when the instruction information "3" is displayed on the instruction display 16, the player performs the stop operation in the order of "center left/right". In other words, the above configuration can be said to instruct the player to perform the stop operations in the order of "middle left and right" by displaying the instruction information "3".

As shown in FIG. 14(b), if Plum CR (1 to 4) is won in each game during the instruction period, the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number "04". When the instruction number "04" is determined, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display the number "4" (hereinafter referred to as "instruction information "4") as instruction information. As described above, when Plum CR (1 to 4) is won, the correct order of pressing the Plums is "middle right left". In the above configuration, in a game where the instruction information "4" is displayed, if the stop operation is performed in the order of "middle right left", it is more advantageous than if the stop operation is performed in any other order. Therefore, when the instruction information "4" is displayed on the instruction display 16, the player performs the stop operation in the order of "middle right left". In other words, the above configuration can also be said to instruct the player to perform the stop operations in the order of "middle right left" by displaying the instruction information "4".

As shown in FIG. 14(b), if Plum RL (3 to 6) is won in each game during the instruction period, the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number "05". When the instruction number "05" is determined, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display the number "5" (hereinafter referred to as "instruction information "5") as instruction information. As described above, when Plum RL (3 to 6) is won, the correct order of pressing the Plums is "right, left, middle." With the above configuration, in a game where instruction information "5" is displayed, if the stop operations are performed in the order of "right, left, center", it is more advantageous than if the stop operations are performed in any other order. Therefore, when the instruction information "5" is displayed on the instruction display 16, the player performs the stop operation in the order of "right, left, middle". The above configuration can also be said to instruct the player to perform the stop operations in the order of "right, left, middle" by displaying the instruction information "5".

As shown in FIG. 14(b), if Plum RC3 is won in each game during the instruction period, the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number "06". When the instruction number "06" is determined, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display the number "6" (hereinafter referred to as "instruction information "6") as instruction information. As described above, when Plum RC3 is won, the correct press order for the Plums is "right middle left". With the above configuration, in a game where instruction information "6" is displayed, if the stop operation is performed in the "right middle left" order, it is more advantageous than if the stop operation is performed in any other order. Therefore, when the instruction information "6" is displayed on the instruction display 16, the player performs the stop operation in the order of "right center left". In other words, the above configuration can also be said to instruct the player to perform the stop operations in the order of "right middle left" by displaying the instruction information "6".

As shown in FIG. 14(b), in the instruction period of the internal medium state, if Plum CL (5, 6) is won, the main CPU 301 will issue the instruction as in the case where Plum CL (1 to 4) is won. Determine the number "03". Further, in the instruction period of the internal medium state, when Plum CR (5, 6) is won, the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number "04" in the same way as when Plum CR (1 to 4) is won. Furthermore, in the instruction period of the internal medium state, when Plum RL (1, 2) is won, the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number "05", as in the case where Plum RL (3 to 6) is won. In the instruction period of the internal medium state, when Plum RC (1, 2) is won, the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number "06" in the same way as when Plum RC3 is won.

In the above configuration, if Plum CL (5, 6), Plum CR (5, 6), Plum RL (1, 2), or Plum RC (1, 2) wins in the internal state, the displayed instruction information By performing the stop operations in this order, the correct answer plum will be won. However, as mentioned above, if Plum CL (5, 6), Plum CR (5, 6), Plum RL (1, 2) or Plum RC (1, 2) is won in a non-internal state, any suspension will occur. Even if the order of operations is correct, the correct plum will not be able to win. Considering the above circumstances, the main CPU 301 determines that Plum CL (5, 6), Plum CR (5, 6), Plum RL (1, 2), or Plum RC (1, 2) wins in the non-internal state. If so, the instruction number "00" is determined and the instruction information is not displayed.

As shown in FIG. 14(b), in each game during the instruction period, if the reach winning combination (1, 2) is won, the main CPU 301 will issue the instruction The number "04" is determined and the instruction information "4" is displayed. As mentioned above, if the reach mark (1, 2) is won, if you perform the stop operation in an irregular press order (including the press order of "middle right left"), the correct plum will be won, and it will be more advantageous than if you perform the stop operation in the left 1st position. Become. In this embodiment, in the game during the instruction period in which the reach winning combination (1, 2) is won, the instruction information "4" is displayed and the stop operation order of "center right left" is instructed. That is, in the game during the instruction period in which the reach winning combination (1, 2) is won, a stop operation order advantageous to the player is instructed.

As shown in FIG. 14(b), in each game during the instruction period, if the reach character (3 to 5) is won, the main CPU 301 will issue the instruction number "06", similar to the case where Plum RC3 is won. The instruction information "6" is displayed. As mentioned above, if the reach mark (3 to 5) is won, if you perform the stop operation in an irregular press order (including the press order of "right middle left"), the correct plum will be won, which is more advantageous than stopping at the 1st left position. become. In this embodiment, in the game during the instruction period in which the reach winning combination (3 to 5) is won, instruction information "6" is displayed and the stop operation order of "right center left" is instructed. That is, in the game during the instruction period in which the reach winning combination (3 to 5) is won, a stop operation order advantageous to the player is instructed.

As shown in FIG. 14(b), in each game during the instruction period, if the reach winning combination (6, 7) is won, the main CPU 301 will issue the instruction as in the case where the plum RL (3 to 6) is won. The number "05" is determined and the instruction information "5" is displayed. As described above, when the reach symbol 6 is won, if you perform the stop operation on the right 1st (including the pressing order of "right left middle"), the correct plum will be won, which is more advantageous than the stop operation on the left 1st or middle 1st. In addition, when the reach symbol 7 is won, if the stop operation is performed in an irregular pressing order (including the pressing order of "right, left, center"), the correct plum will be won, which is more advantageous than the stop operation in the left 1st position. In the present embodiment, in the game during the instruction period in which the reach winning combination (6, 7) is won, instruction information "5" is displayed and a stop operation order of "right, left, center" is instructed. That is, in the game during the instruction period in which the reach winning combination (6, 7) is won, a stop operation order advantageous to the player is instructed.

FIG. 14(c) is a schematic diagram of the segment display device D. The segment display device D includes the instruction display device 16 described above. The instruction display 16 is a single digit, 7 segment display. FIG. 14(c) illustrates an instruction display 16 that displays instruction information "1". As shown in FIG. 14(c), the segment indicator D includes an advantageous section indicator 38. The advantageous section indicator 38 is turned on (lights up) in the advantageous section. As described above, each instruction period (BB state, EDBB state) is included in the advantageous section. Therefore, during the instruction period in which instruction information is displayed on the instruction display 16, the advantageous section indicator 38 lights up.

FIG. 14(d) is a diagram for explaining the timing at which the advantageous section indicator 38 lights up. FIG. 14(d) shows the ball payout state (non-advantageous section, advantageous section) at each point in time, the lighting state of the advantageous section indicator 38 (lights off, on), and each game (...n-1st game, n-th game). , the (n+1)th game, etc.) period is shown.

In the specific example shown in FIG. 14(d), it is assumed that a shift to the advantageous section is determined in the "n"-th game. That is, it is assumed that the processing at the time of transition to an advantageous section is executed in the "n"th game. In the above case, the period up to the "n"th game is a non-advantageous period, and the game after the "n+1"th time is a favorable period. FIG. 14(d) shows the start time ts (the time when the start lever 24 is operated) and the end time te (the time of the third stop) of the "n"-th game.

As shown in FIG. 14(d), the advantageous section indicator 38 of this embodiment lights up at the time when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section. Specifically, the advantageous section indicator 38 lights up from the start operation of the game in which the advantageous section shift process is executed. That is, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14(d), the advantageous section indicator 38 lights up in advance from the non-advantageous section immediately before the advantageous section starts. Note that the timing at which the advantageous section indicator 38 is turned on can be changed as appropriate. For example, the advantageous section indicator 38 may be configured to light up at the time when the game in which the advantageous section shift process has been executed (time te in the specific example of FIG. 14(d)). Furthermore, the advantageous section indicator 38 may be configured to light up when the instruction is first executed by the instruction indicator 16. Furthermore, the advantageous section indicator 38 may be configured to light up immediately after the pseudo game ends (after "Seven-Seven-Seven" is displayed and before the stop operation becomes effective).

FIG. 15A is a diagram for explaining each command (first command, second command) sent from the main CPU 301 to the sub CPU 412.

As shown in FIG. 15(a), the main CPU 301 transmits a first command (such as "A00") to the sub CPU 412 depending on the winning area. For example, if the winning area of the current game is a loss, the main CPU 301 sends a command “A00” to the sub CPU 412. In addition, the main CPU 301 transmits a command "A01" if Replay 1 is won, a command "A02" if Replay 2 is won, and a command "A03" if Replay 3 is won. .

The main CPU 301 of this embodiment determines that the winning area belonging to the specific group has been won when either the batting order plum or the one-card winning combination (1 to 4) is won, and transmits a common first command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 executes Plum L (1, 2), Plum L (3, 4), Plum LC (1, 2), Plum LR (1, 2), Plum CL (1 to 4), Plum CR (1-4), Plum CL (5, 6), Plum CR (5, 6), Plum RL (1, 2), Plum RC (1, 2), Plum RL (3-6) and Plum RC3 ( Regardless of which player in the batting order (Plum) wins, the command "A04" is commonly transmitted. Furthermore, when the one-card winning combination (1 to 4) is won, the main CPU 301 transmits the command "A04" in the same way as when the batting order plum is won.

If Cherry 1 is won, the main CPU 301 transmits the command "A05". Similarly, if the duplicate winning combination 1 (Cherry 1+RBB) is won, the main CPU 301 transmits the command "A05". Furthermore, if Cherry 2 is won, the main CPU 301 transmits the command "A06". Similarly, if the duplicate combination 2 (Cherry 2+RBB) is won, the main CPU 301 transmits the command "A06". If the bell is won, the main CPU 301 transmits the command "A07". Similarly, if the duplicate winning combination 3 (Bell+RBB) is won, the main CPU 301 transmits the command "A07".

The main CPU 301 transmits a command “A08” when the reach mark (1, 2) is won. Similarly, if the duplicate combination (4, 5) is won, the main CPU 301 transmits the command "A08". The main CPU 301 transmits a command “A09” when the reach mark (3 to 5) is won. Similarly, if the duplicate combination (6 to 8) is won, the main CPU 301 transmits the command "A09". The main CPU 301 transmits a command “A10” when the reach symbol (6, 7) is won. Similarly, if the duplicate combination (9, 10) is won, the main CPU 301 transmits the command "A10". Furthermore, when RBB is won, the main CPU 301 transmits the command "A00" in the same way as when it is determined that the winning result is a loss.

When the sub CPU 412 receives the above first command, it determines various effects according to the first command. For example, when the command "A01" in the case where Replay 1 has been won is received, the sub CPU 412 determines an effect to notify that Replay 1 has been won.

In addition to the first command, the main CPU 301 transmits a second command (such as "B01") according to the instruction number (instruction information) of the current game to the sub CPU 412. Specifically, when the instruction number "99" (no instruction) is determined in the current game, the main CPU 301 transmits the command "B99" to the sub CPU 412, as shown in FIG. 15(a). As described above, the instruction number "99" is determined for each game in the non-instruction period. Therefore, during the non-instruction period, the command "B99" is transmitted in every game.

As shown in FIG. 15(a), the main CPU 301 determines that Plum L (1, 2) or Plum LC (1, 2) has won during the instruction period, and that the instruction number "01" (in the order of the middle right on the left) has been won. If determined, the command "B01" is transmitted. In addition, if Plum L (3, 4) or Plum LR (1, 2) is won during the instruction period and the instruction number “02” (left/right middle order) is determined, the main CPU 301 issues the command “B02”. Send. In addition, if Plum CL (1 to 6) is won and the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number "03" (center left/right order), the main CPU 301 transmits the command "B03" and Plum CR (1 to 6) is won. Then, when the instruction number "04" (in the middle right-left order) is determined, the command "B04" is transmitted. Similarly, if Plum RL (1-6) is won and the instruction number "05" (right, left, center order) is determined, the main CPU 301 transmits the command "B05" and Plum RC (1-3) If you win and decide on the instruction number "06" (right middle left order), send the command "B06".

However, as mentioned above, if Plum CL (5, 6), Plum CR (5, 6), Plum RL (1, 2) or Plum RC (1, 2) is won in a non-internal state, any suspension will occur. Even if the order of operations is correct, the correct plum will not be able to win. Considering the above circumstances, the main CPU 301 determines that Plum CL (5, 6), Plum CR (5, 6), Plum RL (1, 2), or Plum RC (1, 2) wins in the non-internal state. If so, the instruction number "00" is determined and the command "B99" is transmitted.

During the instruction period, when the reach character (1, 2) is won and the instruction number "04" (center left/right order) is determined, the main CPU 301 performs the same procedure as when Plum CR (1 to 6) is won. , sends command “B04”. Similarly, the main CPU 301 determines that during the instruction period, if the reach mark (3 to 5) is won and the instruction number "06" (right middle left order) is determined, Plum RC (1 to 3) is won. As in the case above, the command "B06" is sent. In addition, the main CPU 301 determines that during the instruction period, if the reach mark (6, 7) is won and the instruction number "05" (right, left, middle order) is determined, if the plum RL (1 to 6) is won, Similarly, the command "B05" is transmitted.

When the above second command is received by the sub CPU 412, the sub CPU 412 determines an instruction effect that instructs the stop operation order of the instruction number specified by the second command. In the instruction performance, for example, the liquid crystal display device 30 instructs the same stop operation order as the stop operation order specified by the instruction information. As described above, the only second command transmitted during the non-instruction period is the command "B99" (no instruction). Therefore, in principle, no instruction performance is performed during the non-instruction period. However, a configuration may be adopted in which an effect that instructs a stop operation order that does not affect the ball payout rate (has a small effect) is executed.

By the way, let us assume a configuration in which the first commands of plums in the batting order are not grouped. In the above configuration, the correct pressing order of the batting order plums is substantially grasped from the first command (type of batting order plums). Therefore, in this configuration, there is a possibility that a fraudulent act of identifying the correct pressing order of the batting order plum is assumed by acquiring the first command by an unauthorized means (for example, an unauthorized board). Considering the above circumstances, in this embodiment, the first command of each batting order plum is common (grouped). According to the present embodiment described above, since the type of batting order plum (correct pressing order) cannot be specified from the first command, there is an advantage that the above-mentioned fraudulent acts are suppressed.

However, in a game in which a specific group wins, the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out will be larger when the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order than when the stop operation is performed with the left first button. Therefore, even if the first commands of each winning area of a specific group are grouped, if the first command is obtained illegally and it is determined from the first command that a specific group has won, the game will be played in an irregular pressing order. There remains room for wrongdoing. In consideration of the above circumstances, this embodiment adopts a configuration in which the above fraudulent acts are suppressed.

Specifically, in this embodiment, the expected value of the number of medals paid out in a game in which a specific group wins (hereinafter referred to as "group expected value B") is the specified number ( 3 sheets) was adopted. The group expected value B can be obtained using the following equation 2.

In this embodiment, the group expected value B in order 1 (left center right) may be written as "group expected value B1." Similarly, the group expected value B in order 2 (center left and right) to the group expected value B in order 6 (center right) may be written as "group expected value B2" to "group expected value B6". "m" in Equation 2 indicates an integer from "1" to "6" (same as Equation 1 above). Further, "n" in Equation 2 means group number n (same as Equation 1 above). As described above, the specific group is the winning area of group numbers 1 to 12 (see FIG. 10(a)).

"Hnm" in Equation 2 means the number of payout coins that can be awarded when the stop operation is performed in order m in a game in which the winning area of group number n is won (same as Equation 1 above). Furthermore, "Pbnm" in Equation 2 means the probability of attracting a winning combination when the stop operation is performed in order m in a game in which the winning area of group number n wins (same as Equation 1 above). "Pcn" in Equation 2 means the probability that the winning area of group number n wins when a specific group wins. In other words, the probability Pcn means the proportion of cases in which the winning area of group number n wins out of the cases in which the specific group wins. For example, when the set value is "2", the total of each lottery value (see FIG. 5 above) of each winning area of the specific group is "53871". Further, for example, the lottery value (total value) of plums L (1 to 4) of group number 1 is "4596" (1149×4). Therefore, probability Pc1 (n=1) is "4596/53871".

FIG. 15(b) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the group expected value B. In this embodiment, the group expected value B (1 to 6) may change between the internal medium state and the non-internal medium state. Specifically, in the internal middle state, the group expected value B1 at "left middle right" and the group expected value B2 at "left and right middle" of the left 1st are approximately "1.36" in common. Further, similarly to the internal medium state, in the non-internal medium state, the group expected value B1 and the expected value B2 are approximately "1.36" in common.

As shown in FIG. 15(b), in the internal state, the group expected value B (3 to 6) is approximately "2.8" no matter which stop operation order is selected among the irregular press orders. On the other hand, in the non-internal state, the group expected value B (3 to 6) is approximately "1.8" no matter which stop operation order is selected among the irregular press orders. Note that the group expected value B (3 to 6) is smaller in the non-internal medium state than in the internal medium state, just as the expected acquisition value A (3 to 6) is smaller in the non-internal medium state than in the internal medium state. This is the reason (see FIGS. 12(a) and 12(b)). Specifically, the group expected value B (3 to 6) is smaller in the non-internal medium state than in the internal medium state in the specific groups Plum CL (5, 6), Plum CR (5, 6), and Plum This is because if RL (1, 2) and Plum RC (1, 2) win in a non-internal medium state, the correct plum will not win.

As described above, the group expected value B is smaller than the prescribed number of three sheets, regardless of the order of the stop operations. Further, the group expected value B is smaller than the prescribed number of three pieces in any gaming state. In the above configuration, the effect of suppressing the above-mentioned fraudulent behavior using the first command is particularly remarkable compared to a configuration in which the group expected value B can be larger than 3 depending on the stop operation order or the gaming state. It is.

However, since the type of winning area cannot be specified using the grouped first command, there may be a problem that the effects that can be determined based on the first command lack interest. The above-mentioned disadvantages tend to become apparent when, for example, the first commands of all winning areas (batting order plums, reach positions) in which correct plums can win are grouped.

Considering the above circumstances, in this embodiment, among the winning areas where correct plums can win, the first command of plums in batting order (Plum L, etc.) is grouped, while the first commands of plums in the batting order (Plum L, etc.) are grouped, while the reach targets (1 to 7) are The first command adopted a configuration without grouping. The above configuration has the advantage that the performance can be determined depending on whether or not a ready-to-win character has been won and the type of the winning possible-to-reach character, and the above-mentioned inconveniences can be suppressed.

However, in a game in which the reach winning combination (1 to 7) is won, the correct answer plum can be won in the stop operation order according to the type of the reaching winning combination (type of the first command). Therefore, if the first commands that serve as reach targets are not grouped, a new problem may arise in that the above-mentioned fraudulent acts using the first commands are not appropriately suppressed. In consideration of the above circumstances, this embodiment adopts a configuration that can solve the problem. The above configuration will be explained in detail using FIG. 15(c).

FIG. 15C is a diagram for explaining when the combination of the first command and the second command is transmitted from the main control board 300 to the sub control board 400. As shown in FIG. 15(c), during the instruction period, each command is transmitted approximately at the same time as the game start operation (immediately after the start operation). With the above configuration, during the instruction period, the correct pressing order of the batting order plums can be specified on the sub CPU 412 side before the stop operation becomes possible. During the instruction period, the sub CPU 412 determines and makes executable an instruction effect that notifies the correct pressing order specified from the second command before the stop operation becomes possible.

On the other hand, in the non-instruction period, the combination of the first command and the second command is transmitted to the sub-control board 400 substantially simultaneously with the first stop operation (immediately after the first stop operation). With the above configuration, the sub CPU 412 can determine the performance according to the first command (winning area) after the first stop operation. For example, the reference performance lottery table (table that defines the types of performances that can be executed and the probability that each production is determined) can be made different between a game in which the batting order plum is won and a game in which the reach position is won. can. In addition, the effect lottery table to be referred to is a game in which the reach character (1, 2) wins, a game in which the reach character (3 to 5) wins, and a game in which the reach character (6, 7) wins. can be made different.

In addition, as explained using FIG. 10(a) above, in a game where the reach winning combination (1 to 7) is won, whether or not the correct plum (13 plum winning combination) wins is determined by the first stop operation. It is determined by the stop button 25 that is pressed. Specifically, in a game in which the reach winning combination (1 to 5) is won, the correct plum is won in the middle 1st or right 1st. Furthermore, in a game in which the reach symbol 6 is won, a correct plum is won in the right 1st, and in a game in which a reach symbol 7 is won, a correct plum is won in the middle 1st or right 1st. In the above configuration, in a game in which the reach winning combination is won, whether or not the correct plum wins does not change depending on the order of presses after the first stop operation.

As understood from the above explanation, the first command (reach aim) sent after the first stop operation specifies the subsequent advantageous order of stop operations (second stop operation, third stop operation). It's not a thing. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the above-mentioned fraudulent act using the first command of the reach mark can be suppressed (invalidated). As described above, in this embodiment, during the non-instruction period, the first command of the reach character is transmitted at the time of the first stop operation without being grouped, thereby improving the interest of the performance based on the first command, and This makes it possible to suppress fraudulent acts using the first command.

The main CPU 301 calculates various types of game information (continuous combination ratio, role object ratio, most recent successive role ratio, most recent role object ratio, instruction-inclusive role object ratio, bonus game ratio) according to the progress of the game, and calculates the game information. Display information corresponding to the main display 40 is displayed. In order to calculate the above game information, the main CPU 301 counts the number of games played during the period from when the power is first turned on to the gaming machine 1 until the number of games reaches 175,000 (hereinafter referred to as the "total game counting period"). do.

FIG. 16(a) is a diagram for explaining each storage area (G1 to G3, g1, g2) of the main RAM 303. Each of the above-mentioned storage areas is provided to store the above-mentioned game information (continuous combination ratio, etc.), and includes storage area G1, storage area G2, storage area G3, storage area G4, storage area g1, and storage area g2. include. For example, each storage area can store one byte of information.

Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, the period in which the so-called "accessory continuous operation device related to the first type special accessory" operates may be simply referred to as "the first award series". Similarly, the period during which the so-called "accessory continuous operation device related to the second type special accessory" operates may be simply referred to as "second-class special accessory". The first winning combination and the second winning combination end with the payout of a predetermined number of medals. In addition, the period during which the so-called "first class special accessory" is activated is simply referred to as "during the first accessory", and the period during which the so-called "second type special accessory" is activated is simply referred to as "during the second accessory". It may be written as During the first accessory, the game ends after eight games, and during the second accessory, the game ends after one game. In addition, the period during which the so-called "ordinary yakubutsu" operates may be described as "during the ordinary yakubutsu." Normally, the game ends in one game.

The bonus operating state of this embodiment is the first combination of winnings, and all games are during the first winnings. In addition, "1st role general middle" may be provided in the 1st role group. In the first winning combination general, it is easier to win the winning combination (RB winning combination) that activates the first type special accessory compared to the gaming states other than the first winning combination general. Furthermore, when a second role group is provided, a "second role group general middle" may be provided in the second role group. In the second winning series general, it is easier to win the winning winning combination (CB winning combination) that activates the second type special accessory compared to the gaming states other than the second winning combination general.

The successive combination ratio is the number of medals (hereinafter referred to as the "total number of medals A") earned from the time the power is first turned on to the present (hereinafter referred to as the "total gaming period"), of the number of medals in the first role (the number of medals in the first role). This is the ratio of the number of medals (hereinafter referred to as "Number of consecutive medals B") obtained in the first prize (including the first prize) (Continuous prize ratio = B/A). The number of consecutive medals B in this embodiment is the number of medals acquired in the bonus activation state (in the first role of the first role). As shown in FIG. 16(a), the consecutive combination ratio is stored in the storage area G1.

The main CPU 301 calculates the consecutive combination ratio every 400 games, and stores the calculation result in the storage area G1. If the calculation result includes a decimal part, the main CPU 301 discards the decimal part and stores only the integer part as a continuous ratio in the storage area G1.

The accessory ratio is the ratio of the total number of medals obtained in the first accessory, second accessory, and ordinary accessory (hereinafter referred to as "number of accessory medals C") to the total number of medals A. Yes (accessory ratio = C/A). As shown in FIG. 16(a), the accessory ratio is stored in the storage area G2. The number C of accessory medals in this embodiment is the number of medals obtained during the first accessory (bonus operation state) because it is not provided during the second accessory and the normal accessory.

The main CPU 301 calculates the accessory ratio every 400 games, and stores the calculation result in the storage area G2. If the calculation result includes a decimal part, the main CPU 301 discards the decimal part and stores only the integer part as the accessory ratio in the storage area G2. The instruction-inclusive accessory ratio is the total number of medals (C+D) that is the sum of the total number of medals obtained in the game whose pressing order is specified by the instruction display 16 (hereinafter referred to as "instruction game medal number D") and the number of accessory medals C. is the proportion of the total number of medals A (ratio of accessories including instructions = (C+D)/A).

The number D of instructed game medals in this embodiment described above can also be referred to as the total number of medals won by the specified group in games during the instructed period. In this embodiment, in a game where the instruction display 16 has instructed the pressing order, even if the stop operation is performed in a position other than the pressing order (if the pressing order is incorrect), the one-card winning combination can be stopped and displayed. In the above case, the numerical value "1" is added to the instructed number D of game medals.

The main CPU 301 calculates the instruction-included accessory ratio every 400 games, and stores the calculation result in the storage area G3. If the calculation result includes a decimal part, the main CPU 301 discards the decimal part and stores only the integer part in the storage area G3 as the designated accessory ratio. In addition, in a game in which a specific group wins during a non-instruction period, a first command is sent from the main CPU 301 to the sub CPU 412, which indicates that the irregular pressing order is unilaterally advantageous. However, in the above game, even if medals are awarded, the instructed game medal number D is not added.

The most recent successive combination ratio is the number of medals earned in the most recent 6000 games (hereinafter referred to as the "latest total number of medals a") among the first winning combinations (including the first winning combination of the first winning combination) This is the ratio of the number of medals acquired in (hereinafter referred to as the "number of medals in the most recent consecutive combination b") (the most recent consecutive combination ratio = b/a). The most recent successive combination medal number b in this embodiment is the number of medals acquired in the bonus activation state (in the first role of the first role) in the most recent 6000 games. As shown in FIG. 16(a), the most recent consecutive combination ratio is stored in the storage area g1. Note that if the number of games played in the total gaming period is 6000 or less, the consecutive combination ratio and the most recent consecutive combination ratio match (B/A=b/a).

The main CPU 301 calculates the most recent consecutive combination ratio every 400 games, and stores the calculation result in the storage area g1. If the calculation result includes a decimal part, the main CPU 301 discards the decimal part and stores only the integer part as the nearest continuous ratio in the storage area g1.

The most recent yakuza ratio is the total number of medals acquired in the first yakuza, second yakuza, and ordinary yakuza (hereinafter referred to as "the number of yakuza medals c") out of the latest total number of medals a. It is a ratio (accessory ratio = c/a). The number c of accessory medals in this embodiment is not set during the second accessory and the normal accessory, so it is the number of medals acquired during the first accessory (bonus activation state) in the most recent 6000 games. Become. As shown in FIG. 16(a), the most recent accessory ratio is stored in the storage area g2. Note that if the number of games in the total gaming period is 6000 or less, the accessory ratio and the most recent accessory ratio match (C/A=c/a).

The main CPU 301 calculates the most recent accessory ratio every 400 games, and stores the calculation result in the storage area g2. If the calculation result includes a decimal part, the main CPU 301 discards the decimal part and stores only the integer part as the nearest accessory ratio in the storage area g2.

The bonus game ratio is the number of games played by the first winning combination (including during the first winning role), the number of games played by the second winning combination (including during the second winning role), out of the total number of games E during the total gaming period. The number of bonus games F, which is the sum of the number of games in the first role (excluding the first role), the number of games in the second role (excluding the second role), and the number of games in the normal role, is (Bonus game ratio = F/E). The number of bonus games F in this embodiment is the total number of games in the bonus operating state.

As shown in FIG. 16(a), the bonus game ratio is stored in the storage area G4. The main CPU 301 calculates the bonus game ratio for each game and stores the calculation result in the storage area G4. If the calculation result includes a decimal part, the main CPU 301 discards the decimal part and stores only the integer part as the bonus game ratio in the storage area G4.

The above total number of medals A, number of consecutive medals B, number of accessory medals C, number of instruction game medals D, total number of games E, number of bonus games F, most recent total number of medals a, number of most recent consecutive medals b, and accessory The number of medals c is separately stored in a dedicated counter provided in the main RAM 303, and is added up at each of the above-mentioned triggers. For example, when medals are awarded in each game for which an instruction has been executed, the number D of medals for the instructed game is added. Furthermore, when medals are awarded in the bonus activation state, the number C of accessory medals is added. Furthermore, when game media are awarded in each game, the total number of medals A is added regardless of whether or not there is an instruction for the stop operation order.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the total number of games E reaches 175,000 times, updating of the consecutive combination ratio, accessory ratio, instruction-inclusive accessory ratio, and bonus game ratio is stopped. On the other hand, the most recent consecutive winning combination ratio and the most recent winning combination ratio are also updated in the period after the total number of games E reaches 175,000.

FIG. 16(b-1) is a mock diagram of the main display 40 that displays display information HA. When the display information HA is displayed, the first display section 40X of the main display 40 displays the character string "6A" corresponding to the combination ratio, and the second display section 40Y displays the current value of the storage area G1. (size of consecutive combination ratio) is displayed.

Further, when displaying the display information HA, when the ratio information on the second display section 40Y is the number "60" or more (G1≧60), the second display section 40Y displays the ratio information in a blinking manner. Further, in the case of displaying the display information HA, when the number of games in the total game period is less than 17,500, the first display section 40X displays the identification information in a blinking manner.

FIG. 16(b-2) is a mock diagram of the main display 40 that displays the display information HB. When the display information HB is displayed, the character string "7A" corresponding to the accessory ratio is displayed on the first display section 40X of the main display 40, and the current value of the storage area G2 is displayed on the second display section 40Y. is displayed.

Further, when displaying the display information HB, when the ratio information on the second display section 40Y is the number "70" or more (G2≧70), the second display section 40Y displays the ratio information in a blinking manner. Further, when displaying the display information HB and the number of games in the total gaming period is less than 17,500, the first display section 40X displays the identification information in a blinking manner.

FIG. 16(b-3) is a mock diagram of the main display 40 that displays display information HC. When the display information HC is displayed, the character string "7P" corresponding to the instruction-included accessory ratio is displayed on the first display section 40X of the main display 40, and the character string "7P" corresponding to the instruction-included accessory ratio is displayed on the second display section 40Y. The current value is displayed.

Further, when displaying the display information HC, when the ratio information on the second display section 40Y is the number "70" or more (G3≧70), the second display section 40Y displays the ratio information in a blinking manner. Further, in the case of displaying the display information HC, when the number of games in the total gaming period is less than 175,000 (E<175,000), the first display section 40X displays the identification information in a blinking manner.

FIG. 16(b-4) is a mock diagram of the main display 40 that displays the display information HD. When the display information HD is displayed, the first display section 40X of the main display 40 displays the character string "6Y" corresponding to the most recent combination ratio, and the second display section 40Y displays the current value of the storage area g1. The value is displayed.

Further, when displaying the display information HD, when the ratio information on the second display section 40Y is the number "60" or more (g1≧60), the second display section 40Y displays the ratio information in a blinking manner. Further, when displaying the display information HD, and when the number of games in the total gaming period is less than 6000, the first display section 40X displays the identification information in a blinking manner.

FIG. 16(b-5) is a mock diagram of the main display 40 that displays the display information HE. When the display information HE is displayed, the first display section 40X of the main display 40 displays the character string "7Y" corresponding to the nearest character ratio, and the second display section 40Y displays the current information in the storage area g2. The value is displayed.

When displaying the display information HE, when the ratio information on the second display section 40Y is the number "70" or more (g2≧70), the second display section 40Y displays the ratio information in a blinking manner. Further, when displaying the display information HE, and when the number of games in the total gaming period is less than 6000, the first display section 40X displays the identification information in a blinking manner.

FIG. 16(b-6) is a mock diagram of the main display 40 that displays display information HF. When the display information HF is displayed, a character string "5F" corresponding to the bonus game ratio is displayed on the first display section 40X of the main display 40, and the current value of the storage area G4 is displayed on the second display section 40Y. is displayed.

When displaying the display information HF, when the ratio information on the second display section 40Y is the number "50" or more (G4≧50), the second display section 40Y displays the ratio information in a blinking manner. Further, when displaying the display information HF and the number of games played in the total gaming period is less than 175,000, the first display section 40X displays the identification information in a blinking manner.

As described above, the above display information is switched and displayed at predetermined time intervals (approximately 5 seconds). Specifically, when the power is turned on, the main display 40 displays a test pattern for about 5 seconds. In the above test pattern, all segments of the main display 40 are displayed blinking. Thereafter, the main display 40 displays each display information for about 5 seconds in the order of display information HC, display information HD, display information HE, display information HA, display information HB, and display information HF. Further, after displaying the display information HF, each display information is repeatedly displayed from the beginning (from the display information HC).

In addition to the period immediately after the power is turned on, the main display 40 may also be configured to display the test pattern during other periods. For example, the main display 40 may be configured to display a test pattern during a period in which the set value can be changed. Further, the main display 40 may be configured to display a test pattern during a period in which the set value can be confirmed. Note that the test pattern may be different between a period immediately after the power is turned on and another period.

<Each data used by sub CPU>
Hereinafter, various data stored in the sub ROM 413 will be explained using the drawings. The sub ROM 413 stores various data including a notification effect determination table.

When the sub CPU 412 receives a second command (other than B99 (no instruction)) indicating an instruction number (instruction information), it determines one of the notification effects using the notification effect determination table. When the notification effect is determined, the sub CPU 412 transmits a performance control command indicating the notification effect to the image control board (image control CPU 421) 420.

When the image control CPU 421 receives a performance control command indicating a notification performance, the image control CPU 421 displays each image of the notification performance on the liquid crystal display device 30. In this embodiment, when the sub control board (sub CPU 412) 400 receives a second command that specifies a stop operation order advantageous to the player (when the main CPU 301 transmits the second command), the second command The notification of the stop operation mode (stop operation order) corresponding to the above is always executed by the sub CPU 412.

Note that from the first command, which indicates that the specific group has won, a stop operation order (irregular press order) that is unilaterally advantageous in the current game is specified. However, the first command does not specifically specify the order of stop operations (order of correct presses) that is advantageous to the player. Even if the sub CPU 412 receives the first command in the non-instruction period, it does not notify the stop operation order.

FIG. 17 is a conceptual diagram of the notification effect determination table. When the sub CPU 412 receives any one of the commands "B01" to "B06" as the second command, it determines the notification effect based on the notification effect determination table. As described above, the commands “B01” to “B06” are transmitted during the instruction period and are not transmitted during the non-instruction period. That is, the sub CPU 412 determines the notification performance based on the notification performance determination table during the game specified by the main CPU 301.

Specifically, in a game in which the first command "A04" is received (a winning game of a specific group), when the second command "B01" is received, the notification effect X1 is determined. In the notification effect X1, the liquid crystal display device 30 or the like notifies the stop operation order of "left center right".

In addition, in a game where the first command "A04" is received, if the second command "B02" is received, the notification effect X2 is determined, and if the second command "B03" is received, the notification effect X3 is determined. If the second command "B04" is received, the notification effect X4 is determined, and if the second command "B05" is received, the notification effect X5 is determined and the second command "B06" is received. If so, notification effect X6 is determined. In the above notification performance X2, the stop order of "left, right, middle" is announced, in the notification performance X3, the stop order of "center, left, right" is announced, and in the notification performance X4, the stop order of "center, right, left" is announced, In the notification effect X5, the stopping order of "center right, left" is notified, and in the notification effect X6, the stopping order of "center right, left" is notified. In each of the above-mentioned notification effects X (1 to 6), the correct pressing order of the batting order plums is notified.

FIGS. 18(a) and 18(b) are diagrams for explaining each table used in the special lottery and the normal lottery (see FIG. 13(a) described above). Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, the special lottery and the regular lottery may be collectively referred to as the "BB lottery." As will be explained in detail using FIG. 19(a), the BB lottery is realized by a determination condition lottery process and a BB determination process. The determination condition lottery process is a process for determining the determination condition Dh. The BB determination process is a process for determining whether or not to transition to the BB state based on the determination condition Dh determined in the determination condition lottery process.

FIG. 18A is a conceptual diagram of a specific example of the determination condition determination table. In the determination condition lottery process, the main CPU 301 determines the determination condition Dh by lottery using the determination condition determination table. As shown in FIG. 18(a), the determination condition determination table is configured to include each lottery value of each determination condition Dh (0 to 5). Each of the above lottery values is provided for each set value. In the determination condition lottery process, the determination condition Dh having a larger lottery value in the determination condition determination table is more likely to be determined. As shown in FIG. 18(a), six types of determination conditions Dh are provided, from determination condition "0" to determination condition "5". As understood from FIG. 18(a), the determination condition lottery process is a process that does not depend on the winning area.

FIG. 18(b) is a conceptual diagram of a specific example of the BB determination table. In the BB determination process, the main CPU 301 uses a predetermined determination condition Dh and refers to a BB determination table to determine whether or not to transition to the BB state. Specifically, in the BB determination process, it is determined whether or not to shift to the BB state according to the combination of the winning area determined in the current game and the determination condition Dh determined in advance.

For example, when the determination condition "0" is determined, in a game in which the BB determination process is executed, if the reach winning combination (1 to 7) is won, a transition to the BB state is determined. Further, when the determination condition "1" is determined, in a game in which the BB determination process is executed, if a reach prize or a cherry is won, a transition to the BB state is determined. When the determination condition "2" is determined, in a game in which the BB determination process is executed, if the reach symbol or the bell is won, a transition to the BB state is determined.

Similarly, when the determination condition "3" is determined, in a game in which the BB determination process is executed, if the reach symbol, cherry or bell is won, a transition to the BB state is determined. Further, when determination condition "4" is determined, in a game in which the BB determination process is executed, if the reach symbol, cherry, bell, replay 2 or replay 3 is won, a transition to the BB state is determined. When determination condition "5" is determined, transition to the BB state is determined regardless of the type of winning area in the game in which the BB determination process is executed (in all winning areas).

The explanation returns to FIG. 18(a). FIG. 18A shows a determination condition determination table that is referred to during the low probability period of the normal state. The above judgment condition determination table is also referred to during the low probability period of the pullback state. The main CPU 301 uses different determination condition determination tables for the low probability period and the high probability period. When a judgment condition determination table for a high probability period is used, a more advantageous judgment condition Dh is more likely to be determined than when a judgment condition determination table for a low probability period is used. With the above configuration, transition to the BB state is more likely to be determined in the high probability period than in the low probability period. Further, in the heaven chance state, the heaven state, and the super heaven state (special lottery), a judgment condition determination table that is more advantageous than the normal state and the pullback state (normal lottery) is referred to.

As described above, in this embodiment, penalty control (main penalty control, sub-penalty control) may be executed when the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order. When penalty control (main penalty control) is executed, a penalty occurs that makes it difficult to determine transition to the BB state in the BB lottery. The above configuration will be explained in detail below.

19(a) and 19(b) are diagrams for explaining a specific example of main penalty control executed by the main CPU 301 among penalty controls. When main penalty control is executed, it becomes difficult to determine transition to the BB state during the non-instruction period. For example, when main penalty control is executed, it becomes difficult to determine transition to the BB state in the BB lottery. The above BB lottery (BB determination process, determination condition lottery process) is executed in each game in a non-instruction state (normal state, pullback state, heaven chance state, heaven state, super heaven state) during the advantageous section.

FIG. 19(a) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the BB lottery. In the specific example of FIG. 19(a), it is assumed that main penalty control is not executed. Each process in FIG. 19A is executed by the main CPU 301 in the order from the process shown on the upper side to the process shown on the lower side. Note that FIG. 19(a) shows a part of each process in the N-th game and the N+1-th game. Further, the determination condition Dh is stored (held) in a specific storage area of the main RAM 303. FIG. 19A shows the determination conditions Dh stored in the main RAM 303 at each time point. The same applies to FIG. 19(b), which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 19(a), when a game start operation (operation of the start lever 24) is executed, a start process is executed. The above start-time processing is completed before the first stop operation can be accepted. Further, the start time process includes a BB determination process (Sa1 in FIG. 19A) and a process to initialize the determination condition Dh (Sa2 in the figure). As described above, in the BB determination process, it is determined whether or not to transition to the BB state using the determination condition Dh. Specifically, in the BB determination process in the current game, it is determined whether or not to transition to the BB state using the determination condition Dh determined in the previous game. For example, in the BB determination process in the Nth game shown in FIG. 19(a), the determination condition Dh determined in the N-1st game is used.

In the specific example of FIG. 19(a), it is assumed that the determination condition "1" is determined in the N-1th game (Dh=1). In the above case, in the BB determination process in the N-th game, it is determined whether or not to transition to the BB state based on the determination condition "1". In the specific example of FIG. 19(a), it is assumed that transition to the BB state is not determined in the BB determination process in the N-th game. As shown in FIG. 19(a), in the start process after the BB determination process is executed, the determination condition Dh is initialized to determination condition "0".

As shown in FIG. 19(a), when all the stop buttons 25 are operated to stop, the stop processing is executed. The stop processing is completed before bet medals for the next game can be inserted. The above-described stop processing includes a determination condition lottery process (Sa3 in the figure). However, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 19(b), if the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order in the current game, the determination condition lottery process in the game will be omitted. In the specific example of FIG. 19(a), it is assumed that a stop operation (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "push in order") is performed at the first stop on the left in the Nth game. In the above case, the determination condition lottery process is executed in the Nth game.

In the determination condition lottery process, the determination condition Dh to be used in the next game is determined by lottery. As described above, the determination condition Dh used in the BB determination process in the current game is initialized (in Sa2 described above) before the determination condition lottery process is executed in the game. Therefore, the determination condition Dh in the main RAM 303 becomes the initial value "0" immediately before the determination condition lottery process is executed.

In the specific example of FIG. 19(a), it is assumed that the determination condition "2" is determined in the Nth game. In the above case, in the Nth game, the determination condition "0" stored in the main RAM 303 is rewritten to the determination condition "2". As shown in FIG. 19(a), the determination condition "2" determined in the N-th game is used in the N+1-th BB determination process. Note that the timing at which the process (Sa2) for initializing the determination condition Dh is executed may be changed as appropriate. For example, the determination condition Dh may be initialized in the stop processing immediately before the determination condition lottery process is executed.

FIG. 19(b) is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the BB lottery. In the specific example of FIG. 19(b), similarly to the specific example of FIG. 19(a) described above, it is assumed that transition to the BB state is not determined in the BB determination process of the N-th game. However, whereas FIG. 19(a) described above shows a specific example in which main penalty control is not executed, the specific example in FIG. 19(b) assumes a case in which main penalty control is executed. In the specific example of FIG. 19(b), it is assumed that penalty control is executed in the Nth game. When the main penalty control is executed in the Nth game, it becomes difficult to determine the transition to the BB state in the N+1th game, compared to the case where the main penalty control is not executed in the Nth game.

Specifically, if the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order in the current game, the determination condition lottery process is omitted in the stop process in the game. For example, in the specific example of FIG. 19(b), it is assumed that the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order in the Nth game. The main CPU 301 determines whether or not the order of stop operations in the game is an irregular press order in the stop processing of each game during the non-instruction period. If it is determined that the pressing order is not irregular, the main CPU 301 executes a determination condition lottery process in the stop process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the pressing order is irregular, the main CPU 301 does not execute the determination condition lottery process in the stop process.

As described above, since the determination condition Dh is initialized in the start time process, the determination condition Dh has an initial value of "0" at the time when the stop time process is executed. Therefore, if the determination condition lottery process is omitted in the stop time process of the current game, the determination condition "0" is used in the BB determination process (start time process) of the next game. For example, in the specific example of FIG. 19(b), since the determination condition lottery process in the N-th game is omitted, the determination condition "0" (initial value) is used in the BB determination process in the N+1-th game.

When the determination condition "0" is used, it is more difficult to determine transition to the BB state in the BB determination process than when other determination conditions Dh (1 to 5) are used. Therefore, in this embodiment, if an irregular press is made in the current game (penalty control is executed), it is less likely to be determined to transition to the BB state in the next game, compared to a case where sequential presses are made in the relevant game. Become.

In addition, in this embodiment, if an irregular press is made in the current game, it becomes difficult to determine the transition to the BB state in the next game, but if it is pressed sequentially in the next game, the BB state will be returned to BB with the normal probability in the next game. The transition to the state is determined. According to the above configuration, there is an advantage that the games that are disadvantageous due to one main penalty control are limited.

As described above, the high probability transition lottery is executed in each game in the normal state and the pullback state. The above high probability transition lottery is included in the processing at the time of suspension. In this embodiment, if the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order in the current game, the high probability transition lottery will not be executed. Furthermore, as described above, a high probability fall lottery is executed during the high probability period. The above-described high probability fall lottery is included in the start time process executed at the start of the game, and is executed regardless of the order of stop operations of the game.

Each process (including penalty control) described above with reference to FIG. 19 is executed regardless of the gaming state (internal state, non-internal state, bonus operation state). That is, in addition to the internal medium state, the BB lottery (judgment condition lottery process, BB determination process) is executed also in the non-internal medium state and the bonus activation state. However, for example, in the bonus operation state, the BB lottery may not be executed regardless of the ball output state. Similarly, in the non-internal state, the BB lottery may not be executed regardless of the ball output state.

FIGS. 20(a) and 20(b) are diagrams for explaining the stock lottery process. As described above, in this embodiment, when the transition to the BB state is determined, the stock lottery process is executed. In the stock lottery process, it is determined by a lottery whether or not the above-mentioned 1G continuous stock and super heaven stock (hereinafter may be collectively referred to as "BB stock") will be awarded. Specifically, in the stock lottery process, stock numbers (0 to 9) are determined by lottery using the stock determination table shown in FIG. 20(a). Additionally, BB stock is provided according to the stock number (see FIG. 20(b)).

As shown in FIG. 20(a), the stock determination table includes each lottery value of each stock number. The stock number with a larger lottery value has a higher probability of being determined in the stock lottery process. For example, when the stock number "0" is determined, as shown in FIG. 20(b), the super heaven stock is not provided, nor is the 1G consecutive stock. Furthermore, when the stock number "1" is determined, one super heaven stock is given, and 1G continuous stock is not given. Similarly, when the stock number "2" is determined, 2 super heaven stocks are given, and when the stock number "3" is decided, 3 super heaven stocks are given, and the stock number "4" is decided. If you do, you will receive 4 Super Heaven Stocks. When the stock number "5" is determined, the Super Heaven stock is not given, but one 1G continuous stock is given. Similarly, when the stock number "6" is determined, the super heaven stock is not given, but two 1G consecutive stocks are given. When the stock number "7" is determined, one super heaven stock and one 1G continuous stock are also given. Similarly, when the stock number "8" is determined, two super heaven stocks and one 1G continuous stock are also given. When the stock number "9" is determined, three Super Heaven stocks and one 1G continuous stock are also given.

As shown in FIG. 20(a), each lottery value for each stock number is different depending on whether the stock preferential treatment flag is in the ON state or in the OFF state. The details will be explained using FIG. 21(a) below, but when it is decided to move to the BB state, the stock preferential treatment flag changes from the OFF state to the ON state, in principle, before the stock lottery process is executed. Be changed. That is, the stock lottery process is normally executed with the stock preferential treatment flag in the ON state. On the other hand, in a game where the transition to the BB state has been decided, if the main penalty control is executed (if the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order), the stock preferential flag will be in the OFF state when the stock lottery process is executed. (See FIG. 21(b)).

The stock determination table of this embodiment is configured such that BB stock is less likely to be granted when the stock preferential treatment flag is in the OFF state than when the stock preferential treatment flag is in the ON state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 20(a), when the stock preferential treatment flag is in the ON state, stock numbers "1" to "9" can be determined. As shown in FIG. 20(b), when stock numbers "1" to "9" are determined, BB stock (1G continuous stock and/or Super Heaven stock) is given. On the other hand, as understood from FIG. 20(a), when the stock preferential treatment flag is in the OFF state, only stock number "0" is determined, and stock numbers "1" to "9" are not determined. As shown in FIG. 20(b), if the stock number "0" is determined, no BB stock will be provided. Therefore, when the stock preferential treatment flag is in the OFF state, BB stock is not provided.

As described above, in a game where it has been decided to shift to the BB state, when the main penalty control is executed (when the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order), the stock lottery process is executed with the stock preferential flag in the OFF state. The above configuration can also be said to mean that if a stop operation is performed in an irregular press order in a game in which transition to the BB state has been determined, BB stock will not be awarded.

Note that the content of the stock lottery process can be changed as appropriate. For example, if the remaining number of games in the advantageous section is less than a threshold value (for example, 400 times), it may be configured such that BB stock is less likely to be awarded. Furthermore, if the remaining number of games in the advantageous section is less than or equal to a threshold value, a configuration may be adopted in which BB stock is more likely to be awarded. Further, even if the main penalty control is executed, the BB stock may be provided with a lower probability than when the main penalty control is not executed.

21(a-1), FIG. 21(a-2), FIG. 21(b-1), and FIG. 21(b-2) are for explaining other specific examples when main penalty control is executed. This is a diagram. As described above, when the main penalty control is executed, a penalty occurs in which BB stock is not awarded in the stock lottery process.

FIG. 21(a-1) is a diagram for explaining a specific example when the stock lottery process is executed. In the specific example of FIG. 21(a-1), it is assumed that main penalty control is not executed. Each process in FIG. 21(a-1) is executed by the main CPU 301 in the order from the process shown at the top to the process shown at the bottom. Note that part of each process is shown in 17(a-1). Further, the above-mentioned stock preferential treatment flag is stored (held) in a specific storage area of the main RAM 303. FIG. 21(a-1) shows the state (ON/OFF) of the stock preferential treatment flag (Fg) stored in the main RAM 303 at each time point. The same applies to FIG. 21(a-2).

As described above, when the game start operation is executed, the start time process is executed. The above start-time processing includes BB determination processing. As described above, in the BB determination process, it is determined whether or not to transition to the BB state. In the specific example of FIG. 21(a-1), it is assumed that transition to the BB state is determined in the BB determination process. In addition, in this embodiment, the stock preferential treatment flag is basically in the OFF state in the ball release state other than the BB state. As shown in FIG. 21(a-1), the stock preferential treatment flag becomes OFF at the time when the transition to the BB state is determined (at the time when the start process is executed).

When the last stop operation is executed in the game, the stop processing is executed as described above. In the stop time process in each game, it is determined whether or not the transition to the BB state has been determined in the BB determination process (start time process) of the game. If it is determined that the transition to the BB state has been determined, the stock preferential treatment flag is changed from the OFF state to the ON state (Sb1 in FIG. 21(a-1)). However, as will be described later using FIG. 21(a-2), if the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order, the step of turning the stock preferential flag to the ON state even if the game has been determined to transition to the BB state. (Sb1) is omitted. In the specific example of FIG. 21(a-2), it is assumed that the order is pressed in a game in which a transition to the BB state has been determined. In the above case, the stock preferential treatment flag is turned on in the game.

As shown in FIG. 21(a-1), in a game in which it has been decided to shift to the BB state, a stock lottery process (Sb2 in the same figure) is executed. As described above, in the stock lottery process, it is determined whether or not to award BB stock with probability according to the state of the stock preferential treatment flag. When the stock preferential treatment flag is in the ON state, a lottery is made to determine whether or not BB stock will be awarded at a normal probability (probability that BB stock will be awarded).

FIG. 21(a-2) is a diagram for explaining another specific example when the stock lottery process is executed. In the specific example of FIG. 21(a-2), it is assumed that transition to the BB state is determined, similar to the specific example of FIG. 21(a-1) described above. However, whereas FIG. 21(a-1) above shows a specific example in which main penalty control is not executed, the specific example in FIG. 21(a-2) assumes a case in which main penalty control is executed. When main penalty control is executed in a game in which transition to the BB state has been determined, a penalty is generated in which no BB stock is awarded.

Specifically, in the stop processing of each game, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the stop operation order in the game is an irregular press order. As described above with reference to FIG. 21(a-1), if it is determined that the pressing order is not irregular, the main CPU 301 turns on the stock preferential treatment flag in the stop processing (executes step Sb1). On the other hand, if it is determined that the pressing order is irregular, the main CPU 301 omits step Sb1. In the above case, the stock preferential treatment flag is maintained in the OFF state during the period after the stop processing.

In the above configuration, if a stop operation is performed in an irregular press order in a game in which transition to the BB state has been determined, the stock preferential treatment flag will be in the OFF state at the time when the stock lottery process is executed. Therefore, the stock lottery process is executed with a low probability (the probability of being awarded BB stock is 0).

Note that, as will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 21(b-1), in this embodiment, BB stock may be awarded even in each game in the BB state. However, as will be explained in detail using FIG. 21 (b-2), if the main penalty control is executed in a game in which it is decided to transition to the BB state (the stock preferential flag is not changed to the ON state) case), no BB stock is provided during the subsequent BB state.

FIG. 21(b-1) and FIG. 21(b-2) are diagrams for explaining the stock lottery process in the BB state. In the stock lottery process in the BB state, it is determined whether or not to award one 1G continuous stock with probability according to the winning area of each game.

Specifically, if Replay 2 or Replay 3 is won in the BB state, 1G continuous stock will be awarded with a probability of approximately 1/128. If reach number 6 or reach number 7 is won in the BB state, 1G continuous stock will be awarded with a probability of approximately 1. If a cherry is won in the BB state, 1G continuous stock will be awarded with a probability of approximately 1/64. If Bell wins in the BB state, 1G continuous stock will be awarded with a probability of approximately 1/14. If you win while other winning areas are in BB state, 1G continuous stock will not be given. However, if the main penalty control is executed in a game in which transition to the BB state is determined (if the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order), 1G continuous stock will not be awarded in the BB state.

FIG. 21(b-1) is a diagram for explaining a specific example when main penalty control is not executed. FIG. 21(b-1) shows the status (ON/OFF) of the stock preferential treatment flag, the content of the stock lottery process, and the ball payout status at each point in time. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 21(b-1), it is assumed that a transition to the BB state is determined in the N-th game in the normal state. Specifically, it is assumed that the transition to the BB state is determined at the start operation t1 of the game, and the stock lottery process is executed at the final stop operation t2 of the game. The same applies to FIG. 21(b-2), which will be described later.

In the specific example of FIG. 21(b-1), it is assumed that the order is pressed in the Nth game. In the above case, in the game, the stock preferential treatment flag is changed to the ON state at the third stop, and the stock lottery process is executed with the normal probability. Further, from the next game of the Nth game, the ball output state shifts to the BB state.

In each game in the BB state, it is determined whether or not the stock preferential treatment flag is in the ON state, and if the stock preferential treatment flag is in the ON state, the stock lottery process is executed. As shown in FIG. 21(b-1), when the stock preferential flag is changed to the ON state in a game where the BB state is won, the stock preferential flag is maintained in the ON state until the BB state ends. Therefore, when the stock preferential treatment flag is changed to the ON state in a game in which the BB state is won, the stock lottery process is executed in each game in the BB state.

FIG. 21(b-2) is a diagram for explaining a specific example when main penalty control is executed. Specifically, in the specific example shown in FIG. 21(b-2), it is assumed that in the N-th game in which transition to the BB state has been determined, the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order. In the above case, in the Nth game, the stock preferential treatment flag is not changed to the ON state (the OFF state is maintained) at the third stop, and the stock lottery process is executed with a low probability.

As described above, in each game in the BB state, it is determined whether or not the stock preferential treatment flag is in the ON state, and if the stock preferential treatment flag is in the ON state, the stock lottery process is executed. However, as shown in Figure 21 (b-2), if the stock preferential flag is not changed to the ON state in a game where the transition to the BB state has been decided, the stock preferential flag will remain in the OFF state until the BB state ends. be done. Therefore, if the stock preferential treatment flag is not changed to the ON state in a game for which transition to the BB state has been determined, the stock lottery process will not be executed in each game in the BB state. That is, if the main penalty control is executed in a game in which transition to the BB state is determined, 1G continuous stock will not be awarded in the subsequent BB state.

In this embodiment described above, if the main penalty control is executed in a game in which a transition to the BB state has been determined, 1G continuous stock will not be awarded in the game in which the transition to the BB state has been determined and during the BB state. , the 1G continuous stock becomes 0 at the time the BB state ends. That is, the BB state ends in one shot. In addition, even if main penalty control is executed in a game in which a transition to the current BB state has been determined, in the subsequent non-instruction period, the next push will be performed in a game in which a transition to a new BB state has been determined. In this case, the stock lottery process is executed as usual during the game in which the new BB state is won and during the BB state.

Further, even if the main penalty control is executed in a game in which a transition to the BB state is determined, the transition lottery at the end of the BB state (see FIG. 13(a)) is executed as usual. However, if the main penalty control is executed in a game where the transition to the BB state has been decided, the transition lottery at the end of the BB state may be disadvantageous compared to the case where the main penalty control is not executed. good.

Each process (including penalty control) described above with reference to FIG. 21 is executed regardless of the gaming state (internal state, non-internal state, bonus operation state). That is, the stock lottery process is executed not only in the internal state but also in the non-internal state and the bonus activation state. However, for example, in the bonus operating state, the stock lottery process may not be executed regardless of the ball output state. Similarly, in the non-internal state, the stock lottery process may not be executed regardless of the ball release state.

FIGS. 22(a), 22(b-1), and 22(b-2) are diagrams for explaining other specific examples in which main penalty control is executed. As will be explained in detail below, when the main penalty control is executed, the number of games required for various counters to reach predetermined threshold values is extended.

FIG. 22(a) is a diagram for explaining various counters provided in the main RAM 303. As described above, the main RAM 303 is provided with a high security certificate counter, a heaven chance counter, an advantageous section ceiling counter, a BB ceiling counter, a pullback ceiling counter, a heaven ceiling counter, and a super heaven ceiling counter. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, each of the above counters may be collectively referred to as a "specific counter". FIG. 22(a) shows the initial value of the specific counter, the update timing, and the control when the counter reaches the numerical value "0".

FIG. 22(b-1) and FIG. 22(b-2) are diagrams for explaining a specific example of the specific counter updating process in each game. FIG. 22(b-1) shows a specific example where main penalty control is not executed. On the other hand, FIG. 22(b-2) shows a specific example when main penalty control is executed. As described above, the start process is executed in response to the game start operation. As shown in FIG. 22(b-1) and FIG. 22(b-2), the high security certificate counter among the specific counters is subtracted in the start process (Sc1 in the figure).

As shown in FIG. 22(b-1) and FIG. 22(b-2), in the stop processing executed in response to the third stop operation, specific counters other than the high probability guarantee counter are subtracted (Sc2). However, in the stop processing of each game, it is determined whether or not the stop operation was performed in an irregular press order in the game, and if the presses were pressed in order, a specific counter is subtracted (FIG. 22 (b-1)). If the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order, the process of subtracting the specific counter is omitted (FIG. 22(b-2)).

According to the above configuration, the high probability guarantee counter is decremented regardless of the presence or absence of main penalty control. Therefore, there is an advantage that by performing the stop operation in an irregular press order, the number of games played until the high probability guarantee counter is decremented to the numerical value "0" cannot be illegally extended. Note that the high probability fall lottery is executed regardless of the presence or absence of main penalty control. Therefore, it is impossible to illegally extend the high probability period by performing a stop operation in an irregular pressing order.

Furthermore, when the main penalty control is executed, the number of games required for the heaven ceiling counter to reach the numerical value "0" is extended. In the above configuration, when the main penalty control is executed, the average number of games played until the transition from the heaven state to the BB state is extended, which is disadvantageous for the player. Similarly, when the main penalty control is executed, the number of games required for the super heaven ceiling counter to reach the numerical value "0" is extended, which is disadvantageous for the player.

When the main penalty control is executed, the number of games required for the advantageous section ceiling counter to reach the numerical value "0" is extended. That is, the average number of games played until transition to the BB state or EDBB state is extended. Furthermore, if the number of games required for the advantageous section ceiling counter to reach the numerical value "0" is extended, the number of games played in the EDBB state is shortened, as described above. Therefore, it is disadvantageous for the player. Furthermore, when the main penalty control is executed, the number of games required for the BB ceiling counter to reach the numerical value "0" is extended, which is disadvantageous for the player.

When the main penalty control is executed, the number of games required for the pullback ceiling counter to reach the numerical value "0" is extended, which is disadvantageous for the player. As described above, in each game in the pullback state, the pullback ceiling counter is decremented and the falling lottery is executed. In this embodiment, when the main penalty control is executed in the pullback state (when the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order), the process of subtracting the pullback ceiling counter is omitted, but the fall lottery is executed.

When the main penalty control is executed, the number of games required for the heaven chance counter to reach the numerical value "0" is extended. In other words, the heavenly chance state is extended. As described above, after the heavenly chance state ends, the state shifts to the pullback state. Further, in the heavenly chance state, the pullback ceiling counter is not decremented. Therefore, when the heavenly chance state is extended, the number of games required for the pullback ceiling counter to reach the numerical value "0" is substantially extended.

In this embodiment, the heaven ceiling counter, the super heaven ceiling counter, the advantageous section ceiling counter, the BB ceiling counter, and the pullback ceiling counter (hereinafter collectively referred to as "ceiling counters") are subtracted to the numerical value "0" and the state shifts to the BB state. If so, the stock lottery process described above is executed. Further, as explained using FIG. 22(b-2), the ceiling counter is not decremented in a game in which the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order (a game in which main penalty control is executed). That is, in a game where the ceiling counter is decremented to the numerical value "0", the main penalty control is not executed. In the above configuration, when the ceiling counter is decremented to the numerical value "0" and shifts to the BB state, the stock preferential treatment flag is turned on when the stock lottery process is executed.

Each process (including penalty control) explained in FIG. 22 (b-1) and FIG. 22 (b-2) above is executed regardless of the gaming state (internal state, non-internal state, bonus operation state). be done. That is, the specific counter is updated not only in the internal state but also in the non-internal state and the bonus operation state. However, for example, in the bonus operating state, the specific counter may not be updated regardless of the ball output state. Similarly, in the non-internal state, the specific counter may not be updated regardless of the ball release state. In the above configuration, after the gaming state in which the specific counter is not updated ends, updating of the specific counter is restarted. Note that the advantageous section counter and the MY counter are updated in all games in the advantageous section, regardless of the gaming state, the ball output state, and the presence or absence of main penalty control.

As can be understood from the above explanation, the main penalty control of this embodiment is executed only in games in which stop operations are performed in an irregular press order. Assume a configuration in which main penalty control is executed in a plurality of games including games in which stop operations are performed in an irregular press order. For example, assume a configuration in which, when a stop operation is performed in an irregular press order, it is determined to move to a low probability period over a plurality of games. With the above configuration, if the previous player cancels the game immediately after performing a stop operation in an irregular press order, there is an inconvenience that a penalty will be given to the next player as well. According to this embodiment, the above disadvantages are suppressed. The above is an explanation of the main penalty control.

In this embodiment, the common main penalty control is executed during the non-instruction period (excluding the non-advantageous period) regardless of the gaming state (internal state, non-internal state, bonus operation state). Ru. Specifically, when the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order in the internal state of the non-instruction period, the main penalty control is executed. Furthermore, if a stop operation is performed in an irregular press order in a non-internal state during a non-instruction period, main penalty control is executed. Similarly, if the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order in the bonus operating state during the non-instruction period, the main penalty control is executed.

Assume a configuration in which the presence or absence of main penalty control is switched for each gaming state. With the above configuration, it is assumed that some players may inconvenience that the period in which the main penalty control is executed (gaming state) may be mistaken as the period in which the main penalty control is not executed. According to this embodiment, the main penalty control is executed regardless of the gaming state, so the above-mentioned inconveniences are suppressed. Further, according to this embodiment, for example, compared to a configuration in which the presence or absence of main penalty control is switched depending on the gaming state, there is an advantage that the processing that the main CPU 301 executes in each gaming state can be easily standardized.

The sub-penalty control will be explained below using FIG. 23(a). Note that when the main penalty control is executed by the main CPU 301, a penalty related to the instruction function of the instruction display device 16 is applied, such as making it difficult to shift to the BB state. On the other hand, even if the sub-penalty control is executed by the sub-CPU 412, a penalty related to the instruction function of the instruction display device 16 is not given (there is no effect on the ball output rate).

FIG. 23(a) is a diagram for explaining a specific example when sub-penalty control is executed. When the sub-penalty control is executed, the aspect of the performance changes compared to the case where the sub-penalty control is not executed. Furthermore, sub-penalty control is, in principle, executed when main penalty control is executed. Therefore, by changing the presentation mode using the sub-penalty control, it is substantially announced that the main penalty control will be executed.

FIG. 23(a) shows the control details of the main CPU 301, the control details of the sub CPU 412, the sounds (voices, music, sound effects) output from the speakers, and the images displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30 at each point in time. . The specific example in FIG. 23(a) assumes a non-instruction period. During the non-instruction period, penalty control is executed if the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order.

The sub CPU 412 executes a performance lottery process in response to a game start operation. In the performance lottery process, the performance to be performed in the current game is determined by lottery. In each game, a performance determined by a performance lottery process is executed. The above performances include, for example, a performance that notifies (suggests) the winning area determined in the current game, and a performance that makes the player expect to win the BB state. In the above performance, a performance sound corresponding to the performance is output from the speaker, and a performance image corresponding to the performance is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. However, there are cases where no performance is determined in the performance lottery process.

Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, the state of each performance execution means during a period in which the performance determined by the performance lottery process is not executed may be referred to as a "default state." For example, in the default state, the liquid crystal display device 30 displays an image of a specific character walking (see FIG. 24(a) described below). On the other hand, during the period in which the performance is executed, a character GC that performs an action (singing, etc.) according to the performance is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30 (see FIG. 24(b) described later).

In the default state, the speaker does not output sound. On the other hand, during the period in which the performance is performed, performance sounds corresponding to the performance are output from the speaker. However, depending on the ball release state, a specific BGM may be output from the speaker in the default state. For example, in a game in which execution of a performance has not been determined, each performance execution means is in a default state. Further, during the non-gaming period, each performance execution means is in a default state.

In the specific example of FIG. 23(a), it is assumed that the N-th game start operation is executed at time ts1. Further, assume that in the game before the game (N-1th time), penalty control is not executed (it is pressed sequentially). In the above case, the sub CPU 412 executes the effect lottery process immediately after time ts1. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 23(a), it is assumed that it is determined that a performance will be executed in the Nth game. In the above case, as shown in FIG. 23(a), with the game start operation, a performance sound corresponding to the performance is output from the speaker, and a performance image corresponding to the performance is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30.

In the specific example of FIG. 23(a), it is assumed that a stop operation is performed at the middle first stop (an example of an irregular press order) at time tx of the Nth game. In the above case, the sub CPU 412 shifts to the sub-penalty state (executes sub-penalty control) immediately after the first stop operation (substantially at the same time). In the sub-penalty state, in principle, each performance determined in the performance lottery process is not executed. If a performance is executed at the time of transition to the sub-penalty state, the performance will be stopped. However, an effect may be provided that is executed exceptionally in a sub-penalty state. For example, the effect announcing the transition to the BB state may be configured to be executed even in the sub-penalty state.

Specifically, when the middle first stop or the right first stop is made during the non-instruction period, the notification sound is output immediately after that for a predetermined period of time (an example of irregular press notification). The notification sound is a sound for notifying the order of the stop operations actually executed by the player (see FIG. 23(b)). When the notification sound is output, the output of the effect sound that was output before the first stop operation is stopped.

Further, when the middle first stop or the right first stop is performed during the non-instruction period, a notification image is displayed for a predetermined period of time immediately after the first stop operation (an example of irregular press notification). The notification image is an image for notifying the order of the stop operations actually executed by the player (see FIG. 23(b)). Note that during the instruction period, regardless of whether the stop operation mode is notified or not, the notification image is not displayed and the notification sound is not output even if the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order.

In the specific example of FIG. 23(a), it is assumed that the third stop operation of the N-th game is executed at time te1. As described above, in a game where stop operations are performed in an irregular press order, when the third stop operation is executed, the main CPU 301 executes main penalty control. The above configuration can also be said to mean that the time point (tx) at which the sub-penalty control is executed is different from the time point (te1) at which the main penalty control is executed. According to the above configuration, compared to, for example, a configuration in which sub-penalty control is executed simultaneously with main penalty control, there is an advantage that the degree of freedom in timing of executing sub-penalty control is improved. That is, there is an advantage that the degree of freedom in the output timing of the notification sound and the display timing of the notification image is improved.

As shown in FIG. 23(a), if the current game shifts to the sub-penalty state, the sub-penalty state will continue in the next game as well. Specifically, when the vehicle enters the sub-penalty state, the sub-penalty state continues until the vehicle is stopped at the first left stop, the vehicle shifts to the BB state, or the power is turned off/on. Further, in the sub-penalty state, the effect lottery process is not executed. In the above configuration, the performance lottery process is not executed in the next game after the game that has transitioned to the sub-penalty state. Therefore, no performance will be performed in the next game after the game that has transitioned to the sub-penalty state.

For example, in the specific example of FIG. 23(a), the sub-penalty state occurs from the time tx when the first stop operation is performed in the Nth game to the time ty when the first stop operation is performed in the N+1th game. Therefore, at the time of the (N+1)th game start operation, the player enters a sub-penalty state. That is, at the time when the performance lottery process in the N+1-th game is originally executed, the sub-penalty state continues. In the above case, the performance lottery process in the N+1-th game is not executed, and no performance is executed in the game (each performance execution means is in a default state). In the specific example of FIG. 23(a), since the sub-penalty state ends in the N+1st game, the performance lottery process can be executed and the performance can be performed in the N+2nd game.

In this embodiment, as described above, in the internal medium state, the expected acquisition value A is different depending on whether the stop operation is performed at the middle 1st position or the case where the stop operation is performed at the right 1st position (A3, 4≠A5, 6). However, in the internal medium state, the sub CPU 412 executes the same effect processing when the stop operation is performed at the middle 1st position and when the stop operation is performed at the right 1st position. Specifically, when the stop operations are performed in an advantageous press order, the sub CPU 412 performs a process for outputting a notification sound, a process for displaying a notification image, and a sub penalty state regardless of the order of the stop operations. Commonly execute the process to start.

The above configuration has the advantage that the design of the performance process is simpler compared to a configuration in which completely different performance processes are executed depending on the type of advantageous press order. Further, as described above, in the non-internal medium state, the expected acquisition value A is different depending on whether the stop operation is performed at the middle 1st position or the case where the stop operation is performed at the right 1st position. However, in the non-internal medium state, the sub CPU 412 executes the same effect processing when the stop operation is performed at the middle 1st position and when the stop operation is performed at the right 1st position (same as in the internal medium state). With the above configuration, the effect of simplifying the design of the effect processing is particularly remarkable. In addition, in the bonus operating state, the sub CPU 412 executes the same effect processing when the stop operation is performed in the middle 1st position and when the stop operation is performed in the right 1st position (same as in the internal medium state and the non-internal medium state).

FIG. 23(b) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of a notification image and notification sound. As shown in FIG. 23(b), in this embodiment, the combination of the notification image and the notification sound differs depending on the stop button 25 (middle, right) used for the first stop operation.

Specifically, when a stop operation is performed at the middle first stop during the non-instruction period, the notification image GM1 is displayed. The notification image GM1 is an image that displays the message "Pressed from inside" (see FIG. 24(c-1) described later). Furthermore, when a stop operation is performed at the first stop during the non-instruction period, a notification voice saying "Pushing from inside" is output. On the other hand, when a stop operation is performed at the right first stop during the non-instruction period, the notification image GM2 is displayed. The notification image GM2 is an image that displays the message "Pushing from the right" (see FIG. 24(c-2) described later). Furthermore, when a stop operation is performed at the right first stop during the non-instruction period, a notification voice saying "Pushing from the right" is output. Even if the left first stop is made during the non-instruction period, the notification image is not displayed and the notification sound is not output.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order, a common notification image is displayed regardless of the gaming state (non-internal state, internal state, bonus operation state). Furthermore, if the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order, a common notification sound is output regardless of the gaming state. For example, when a stop operation is performed in the middle 1st, the notification image GM1 is displayed regardless of the gaming state, and a notification voice saying "You are pressing from the inside" is output. Furthermore, in this embodiment, if a stop operation is performed in an irregular press order, the game transitions to a sub-penalty state regardless of the gaming state.

By the way, as mentioned above, when playing the game with the irregular press order, the processing related to the instruction function of the instruction display 16 (judgment condition lottery process, stock lottery process, ceiling counter subtraction) is different from when playing with the first left stop. ) becomes disadvantageous (common to each gaming state). On the other hand, if you play the game with the irregular press order, the expected value of medals will be higher than if you play the game with the first stop on the left. That is, the gameplay changes depending on whether the game is played with the first left stop or the game with the irregular press order. In the present embodiment described above, some players may prefer the gameplay when playing with the first left stop, while others may prefer the gameplay when playing with an irregular press order.

However, with a configuration that warns players that they have played the game with an irregular press order, even players who prefer the gameplay when playing with an irregular press order may experience the inconvenience of having to play at the first stop on the left. obtain. For example, in a comparative example in which a warning is given to "please press from the left" when a stop operation is performed in an irregular press order, some players may stop playing the game in an irregular press order.

In consideration of the above circumstances, the present embodiment employs a notification image and a notification sound that make it difficult to determine that a warning has been issued for a stop operation performed in an irregular press order. Specifically, the notification image and notification sound of this embodiment do not instruct the left first stop, but merely notify the fact that the stop operation has been performed in an irregular press order. According to the above configuration, there is an advantage that the above-mentioned disadvantages are suppressed compared to the above-mentioned comparative example.

FIG. 24(a), FIG. 24(b), FIG. 24(c-1), and FIG. 24(c-2) are diagrams for explaining each image displayed before and after sub-penalty control is executed. be. Each of the above figures shows a specific example of each image displayed in the normal state or the pulled back state. Note that, as described above, a common image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30 in the normal state and the pulled-back state.

FIG. 24(a) is a specific example of each image displayed in the default state (when no effect is executed). The liquid crystal display device 30 of this embodiment displays various images including, for example, a character GC and a game count image GE in a default state. Furthermore, in the default state, a background image GHa is displayed behind each image. Immediately after the liquid crystal display device 30 shifts to the default state, the character GC is displayed at the initial position P in FIG. 24(a), and then moves back and forth (walks) in the direction of the black arrow shown in the figure. In FIG. 24(a), the character GC displayed at the initial position P is shown by a broken line.

The number of games image GE is an image for displaying the number of games played since the previous BB state ended. Specifically, with each game start operation, the number in the game count image GE is incremented by "1". However, it may be configured such that the number of the number of games image GE is added at the third stop. As described above, the game shifts to the BB state after 998 games after the previous BB state ends (the ceiling function is activated). The player can grasp the number of games until the ceiling function is activated by the number of games image GE.

FIG. 24(b) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the effect image. The specific example of FIG. 24(b) shows a case where a continuous performance is executed among the various performances. In the continuous performance, various performance images including the singing character GC are displayed. Furthermore, the number of games image GE is also displayed during the period in which the performance image is displayed. However, the number-of-games image GE may be temporarily hidden during the period in which the effect image is displayed, and the number-of-games image GE may be displayed again when the effect ends and the state shifts to the default state. In each performance, a background image corresponding to the performance is displayed. For example, in the continuous effect shown in FIG. 24(b), the background image GHb is displayed behind each image.

The continuous performance of this embodiment continues for a maximum of three games. The number of consecutive games is determined by lottery, and is likely to be longer in a high probability period than in a low probability period. It should be noted that a configuration may also be adopted in which a precursor period consisting of a plurality of games is provided from when the transition to the BB state is decided until the actual transition, and continuous performances are executed during the precursor period. In the above continuous performance, the transition to the BB state is finally notified.

FIG. 24(c-1) and FIG. 24(c-2) are diagrams for explaining each image displayed immediately after sub-penalty control is executed (immediately after transition to the sub-penalty state).

FIG. 24(c-1) shows a specific example of each image displayed immediately after the stop operation is performed at the middle first stop (irregular press order). When a stop operation is performed at the middle first stop and a sub-penalty state is started, a notification image GM1 is displayed near the approximate center of the screen. As shown in FIG. 24(c-1), the notification image GM1 displays the message "Pressed from inside".

FIG. 24(c-2) shows a specific example of each image displayed immediately after the stop operation is performed with the right first stop (irregular press order). When a stop operation is performed at the first right stop and a sub-penalty state is started, a notification image GM2 is displayed near the approximate center of the screen. As shown in FIG. 24(c-2), the notification image GM2 displays the message "Pushing from the right."

As described above, when the sub-penalty control is executed, the liquid crystal display device 30 enters the default state. Therefore, when sub-penalty control is executed, each image (character GC, game count image GE, background image Ha) shown in FIG. 24(a) described above was displayed immediately before sub-penalty control was executed. Displayed in place of each image. However, as shown in FIG. 24(c-1) and FIG. 24(c-2), the above-mentioned notification image GM(1, 2) is displayed with priority over other images (on the front side).

Specifically, when the sub-penalty control is executed during the period in which the effect is executed, a notification image GM corresponding to the type of the stop button 25 that was operated the first stop operation is displayed, and the notification image GM is replaced with each effect image being displayed. Each image displayed in the default state is displayed. For example, in the above-mentioned continuous performance (see FIG. 24(b)), when sub-penalty control is executed, the singing character GC, etc. is hidden, and each image displayed in the default state is displayed. . In the above case, the character GC starts to be displayed from the initial position P, as shown in FIGS. 24(c-1) and 24(c-2). Further, in the above case, the background image GHa in the default state is displayed in place of the background image GHb during the continuous performance.

The above configuration can also be said to be such that when the sub-penalty control is executed, the performance being executed is stopped. Further, assume that it is determined that a continuous performance will be performed over three games. Even in the above case, if the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order in the first or second game of a continuous performance, the continuous performance will be stopped at that point (the first stop in the middle or the first stop on the right). , do not execute the remaining continuous effects.

By the way, if the image is suddenly hidden without being faded out, there may be an inconvenience that the screen looks unnatural. Due to the above circumstances, when an image that is currently being displayed is to be hidden, it is normal to fade out the image. In this embodiment, for example, when hiding the effect image without using sub-penalty control (when the effect ends), the effect image is faded out.

However, when a performance in progress is stopped by sub-penalty control, the performance image in the performance is intentionally hidden without being faded out. According to the above configuration, since the performance image is hidden in an unnatural manner when the sub-penalty control is executed, there is an advantage that the player can easily recognize that the sub-penalty control has been executed.

Note that a configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined switching image (eye-catching image) is displayed on the entire screen before and after hiding the effect image. When the above configuration is adopted, when ending a performance without using sub-penalty control, the switching image is displayed and then each image in the default state is displayed, while the current performance is canceled due to sub-penalty control. In some cases, a configuration may be adopted in which each image in a default state is displayed without displaying the switching image.

According to the above configuration, when the sub-penalty control is executed, the switching image that is normally displayed is not displayed at the end of the performance, so it is easy for the player to recognize that the sub-penalty control has been executed. There is an advantage. However, even if the performance is forcibly stopped by sub-penalty control, the switching image may be displayed. With the above configuration, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the screen becomes excessively unnatural when the performance is forcibly stopped.

When the sub-penalty control is executed during the period in which each image in the default state is displayed, the notification image GM corresponding to the type of the stop button 25 that was operated the first stop operation is displayed, and each image displayed in the default state is continues to be displayed. However, if sub-penalty control is executed during the period in which each image in the default state is displayed, the display mode of each image is returned to the display mode immediately after the default state was started.

For example, the character GC starts moving from the initial position P in the default state. In the above configuration, if the character GC is located at a position other than the initial position P at the time when the sub-penalty control is executed (at the time when the first stop operation in the irregular press order is performed), the character GC is returned to the initial position P. . Specifically, when the sub-penalty control is executed, the character GC instantly moves to the initial position P. With the above configuration, some players feel that the display position of the character GC has changed unnaturally when the sub-penalty control is executed.

According to the above configuration, for example, compared to a configuration in which the display mode of each image in the default state does not change at all before and after the sub-penalty control is executed, the player is made aware that the sub-penalty control has been executed. It has the advantage of being easy. Note that in the above configuration, the display of the notification image GM may be omitted when the sub-penalty control is executed.

As described above, when the main penalty control is executed (when the key is pressed irregularly), the ceiling counter updating process is omitted. In consideration of the above circumstances, in this embodiment, when main penalty control is executed, the number in the number of games image GE is not updated. Note that in the above configuration, when the main penalty control is executed, the number-of-games image GE may be temporarily hidden. Specifically, the number-of-games image GE may be hidden during the period of the sub-penalty state.

In this embodiment, as described above, in the internal middle state, the expected acquisition value A is different depending on whether the stop operation is performed in the middle 1st position or the case where the stop operation is performed in the right 1st position (A(3, 4)≠A( 5,6)). However, in the internal middle state, the sub CPU 412 makes it possible to perform the same effects when the stop operation is performed at the middle 1st position and when the stop operation is performed at the right 1st position. Specifically, when the stop operations are performed in an advantageous press order, the sub CPU 412 enables output of a notification sound and display of a notification image regardless of the order of the stop operations. The same applies to the non-internal state and the bonus activation state.

As can be understood from the above description, the present embodiment adopts the "effect that notifies the first stopped stop button" as an example of the "similar effect" of the present invention. In other words, "a performance that notifies that the center first stop operation has been performed" and "a performance that notifies that the right first stop operation has been performed" are similar performances in that they are "performances that notify the fact as is." It can be said that there is. In this embodiment, the notification sound is different depending on whether the stop operation is performed at the middle 1st position or the right 1st position, but the notification sound may be the same. Similarly, although the notification images are different in each of the above cases, they may be the same. That is, the "similar performance" of the present invention is a concept that includes "the same performance."

25(a) and 25(b) are diagrams for explaining specific examples of other images displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. FIG.

As described above, the main RAM 303 is provided with various counters for controlling the ball dispensing state. For example, the main RAM 303 is provided with an advantageous section counter and an MY counter that are updated in advantageous sections. At the end of the advantageous period, all the counters for controlling the ball output state (ball output), including the above-mentioned counters, are initialized. The above configuration can also be said to terminate the flow of the game at the end of the advantageous period. Therefore, depending on the player, there may be an inconvenience that the player's desire to play the game decreases when the advantageous period ends.

In consideration of the above circumstances, the sub control board 400 (sub CPU 412, etc.) of the present embodiment controls the player's motivation to play during the period from the end of the current advantageous section to the start of the next advantageous section. is configured so that it can be easily maintained. The above configuration will be explained in detail below.

FIG. 25(a) is a mock diagram of a screen displayed in the BB state. In the BB state, various images are displayed including the instruction image GS, the number of consecutive attempts image GX, and the number display image GY. The instruction image GS is displayed in the above-mentioned notification effect X (1 to 4) (see FIG. 17), and, for example, notifies the correct pressing order of the batting order plum. The specific example of FIG. 25(a) assumes that among the notification effects X, a notification effect X6 that notifies the "right center left" stop operation order is executed.

The consecutive winning number image GX displays the number of times the player has won the BB state again (hereinafter referred to as the "consecutive winning number") before the 99th game is executed after the BB state ends, including the first BB state. FIG. 25(a) shows a specific example in the BB state where the number of consecutive attempts is three. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, the period from the start of the first BB state until the end of the heavenly chance state may be referred to as a "consecutive chance period". In addition, when transitioning to the EDBB state during the consecutive trial period, the relevant consecutive trial period ends when the EDBB state ends. The number display image GY displays the number of medals (difference between the number of paid out medals and the number of inserted medals; hereinafter referred to as the "number of acquired medals") awarded during the consecutive winning period. FIG. 25(a) shows a specific example where the number of acquired coins is 237.

The sub-RAM 414 of this embodiment is provided with various counters for controlling effects. For example, the sub-RAM 414 is provided with a counter for displaying the number of coins that stores the current value of the number of winnings, a counter for the number of consecutive games that stores the current value of the number of consecutive games, and a counter for effect control. The counter for displaying the number of medals is incremented each time medals are paid out during the consecutive winning period. For example, when nine medals are paid out during a consecutive winning period, the value "9" is added to the counter for displaying the number of medals. In addition, in each game during the consecutive game period, the number of medals used in the game is subtracted from the counter for displaying the number of medals.

The performance control counter is decremented by 1 for each game in a ball-out state (heaven chance state) other than the BB state during the consecutive game period. When the above performance control counter is decremented to the numerical value "0", it is determined that the current consecutive trial period has ended. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, each of the above-mentioned counters in the sub-RAM 414 will be collectively referred to as a "sub-counter." In this embodiment, the sub-counter is maintained without being initialized when the advantageous section ends.

FIG. 25(b) is a diagram for explaining the numerical value of the sub-counter at each time point. FIG. 25(b) shows the numerical values of the sub-counters (Cs1, Cs2, Cs3) at each time point. Further, FIG. 25(b) shows the numerical values of the heaven chance counter (Cm), the MY counter (Cx), and the advantageous section counter (Cy) in the main RAM 303. Further, FIG. 25(b) shows the ball output state at each time point.

The sub CPU 412 of this embodiment shifts to the production state corresponding to the ball dispensing state (the state of the main CPU 301). Each performance execution means (liquid crystal display device 30, etc.) is controlled in a manner according to the performance state. FIG. 25(b) shows the performance state at each point in time. For example, during a period in which the ball output state is in the BB state, the production state becomes a bonus production state. In the bonus performance state, for example, each image shown in FIG. 25(a) described above is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. In addition, during the period in which the ball dispensing state is the normal state or the withdrawn state, the performance state becomes the normal performance state. In the normal performance state, for example, each image shown in FIG. 24(a) described above is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 25(b), during the period when the ball payout state is in the heavenly state, in the non-advantageous section after the end of BB, and during the subsequent period in the heavenly chance state, the performance state becomes the continuous-chan performance state. In other words, the performance state during consecutive games is a performance state in a ball-out state in which there is a high expectation of transition to the BB state. In the above consecutive performance state, for example, various performances are performed that suggest that the transition to the BB state is highly expected. For example, the housing lamp 5 is basically turned off in the normal performance state, but lights up in red in the continuous performance state.

In the specific example of FIG. 25(b), it is assumed that the state shifts to the BB state at time t1 in the heaven state. Further, it is assumed that immediately before transition to the BB state, the number of consecutive attempts counter (Cs2) is a value "Nb-1" (Nb is an integer of 2 or more). In the above case, at time t1, the number of consecutive attempts counter is added to the numerical value "Nb" (the numerical value "1" is added). In addition, in the BB state (bonus performance state), a consecutive chance number image GX displaying the number "Nb" is displayed.

In the specific example of FIG. 25(b), it is assumed that in the BB state, the sheet number display counter is incremented from the numerical value "Nas" to the numerical value "Nae" (Nas and Nae are positive integers). In the above case, at the end of the BB state (time t2), the number display image GY displays the number "Nae". Note that a configuration may be adopted in which the presentation mode (BGM, etc.) in the bonus presentation state (BB state) changes depending on the number of consecutive matches. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the performance mode in the performance state during consecutive matches changes depending on the number of consecutive matches. Similarly, the performance mode in the bonus performance state may be changed depending on the number of acquired coins, or the performance mode in the consecutive winning performance state may be changed according to the acquired number of coins.

In the specific example of FIG. 25(b), it is assumed that a transition to a non-advantageous section is determined in the transition lottery at the end of the BB state. In the above case, each counter (Cm, Cx, Cy) of the main RAM 303 is in an initialized state. On the other hand, the sub-counter is maintained without being initialized even when moving to a non-advantageous period.

For example, in the specific example shown in FIG. 25(b), the counter for displaying the number of sheets at time t2 when the advantageous section ends is the numerical value "Nae", and the number of consecutive passes counter is the numerical value "Nb". The numerical values of each of the above counters are not initialized before and after the end of the advantageous section. Moreover, the numerical value of each counter is not initialized before or after the start of a new advantageous section.

In the specific example of FIG. 25(b), it is assumed that in the first game of the non-advantageous section, it is decided to move to a new advantageous section (time t3). Specifically, assume that the state shifts to the heavenly chance state at the start of a new advantageous section. As shown in FIG. 25(b), at the time when the advantageous section starts, the MY counter (Cx) has an initial value of "0", and the advantageous section counter is set to an initial value of "1500".

In this embodiment, the numerical value of the performance control counter and the numerical value of the heaven chance counter match in principle at each point in the continuous winning period. Specifically, when the heaven chance state is started, the heaven chance counter is set to an initial value of "98", and the production control counter is set to an initial value of "98". Further, the heaven chance counter and the performance control counter are each decremented by a numerical value of "1" in each game.

As described above, when the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order in the heaven chance state which is a non-instruction period, the main CPU 111 omits the process of updating the heaven chance counter. The sub CPU 412 of this embodiment omits the process of updating the production control counter in the next game in which the process of updating the heaven chance counter is omitted. In addition, in a game in which the process of updating the heaven chance counter is omitted, the process of updating the performance control counter may be omitted.

In the above-described embodiment, the time point at which the heavenly chance state ends and the time point at which the performance state during consecutive matches ends (the time point at which the consecutive contest period ends) can be made to coincide. That is, it is possible to synchronize the actual ball release state and the performance state (aspect of the performance execution means). In addition, in this embodiment, the non-advantageous section is set to the continuous-challenge performance state, but during a period after a new advantageous section starts, or at the same time as the start of a new advantageous section, the transition to the continuous-chan performance state is made. It is also possible to have a configuration in which Furthermore, during the consecutive winning period other than the BB state, the number of consecutive winnings may be displayed, or the number of acquired coins may be displayed. As shown in FIG. 25(b), when the continuous winning period ends (when it is determined that the performance control counter has reached the numerical value "0"), the sub-counter is initialized.

FIG. 25(c) is another diagram for explaining the numerical values of each counter at each time point. FIG. 25(c) shows the numerical value of the MY counter (Cx) and the numerical value of the sheet number display counter (Cs1) in the advantageous section X and the advantageous section Y following the advantageous section X. In the specific example of FIG. 25(c), it is assumed that the advantageous section X starts at time ta, and then the first BB state starts from time tb. In the above case, the MY counter does not increase or decrease in principle during the non-instruction period from time ta to time tb (it becomes a substantially numerical value of "0"). Further, at time tb, a continuous period starts. The counter for displaying the number of sheets has a numerical value of "0" at the start time tb of the continuous trial period.

In the BB state, the MY counter (Cx) and the sheet number display counter (Cs1) basically increase. In the specific example of FIG. 25(c), it is assumed that the first BB state in advantageous section X ends at time tc. In the above case, each counter increases in principle from time tb in the BB state to time tc. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 25(c), it is assumed that the advantageous section X continues at the end time tc of the BB state. In the above case, the MY counter is not initialized. Note that, as described above, the counter for displaying the number of sheets is not initialized regardless of whether the advantageous section continues or not. In the specific example of FIG. 25(c), since the period from time tc to time td is not an instruction period, the sheet number display counter and MY counter basically decrease.

In the specific example shown in FIG. 25(c), it is assumed that the second BB state in the advantageous section X is started at a certain time point td in the continuous period. Further, assume that the advantageous section X ends at the end time te of the BB state. In the above case, the MY counter is initialized. Furthermore, if the value of the MY counter (Cx) and the value of the counter for displaying the number of sheets (Cs1) are the same (if the value is "0") at the start of the first BB state in the advantageous section, the advantageous section ends. Until then (until MY counters are initialized), the numerical values of each counter substantially match. In the specific example of FIG. 25(c), the numerical values of each counter substantially match from time tb to time te.

In the specific example of FIG. 25(c), it is assumed that a new advantageous section Y starts from time tf. In the above case, the MY counter at time tf becomes the numerical value "0". On the other hand, the counter for displaying the number of sheets is not initialized regardless of whether the advantageous period continues or not, so in the period after time tf (excluding the period after the end of the consecutive winning period), the counter for displaying the number of sheets is larger than the MY counter. It becomes a numerical value.

In the specific example of FIG. 25(c), it is assumed that the first BB state in the advantageous section Y starts from time tg. Time tg is a continuous period. That is, it is assumed that the third BB state in the continuous period starts from time tg. In the above case, the counter for displaying the number of sheets is not initialized and continues to be updated during the period from time tb when the consecutive viewing period starts to time tg.

In the specific example of FIG. 25(c), since the period from time tf to time tg is not the designated period, the counter for displaying the number of sheets generally decreases. On the other hand, the MY counter initialized at the time tf does not increase or decrease in principle during the continuous period from the time tf to the time tg (it becomes a substantially numerical value of "0"). In the specific example of FIG. 25(c), it is assumed that the first BB state in advantageous section Y ends at time th. Further, assume that the advantageous section Y continues at time th. In the above case, neither the MY counter nor the counter for displaying the number of sheets is initialized.

As understood from the above description, in this embodiment, the sheet number display counter can be added to a larger value than the MY counter (see the period after time tf in FIG. 25(c)). Note that the counter for displaying the number of sheets according to the present embodiment can be added to a value larger than the threshold value "2400" at which the MY counter is initialized. However, with the above configuration, there is a problem that the player's gambling spirit is likely to be excessively stimulated. In consideration of the above circumstances, an upper limit value may be set on the counter for displaying the number of sheets. For example, in the present embodiment described above, a configuration may be adopted in which the counter for displaying the number of sheets does not add up to "2400" or more.

However, in the above configuration, the number-of-sheets display counter may be configured to exceptionally be incremented to the upper limit value "2400" or more. For example, assume that in a game where the MY counter is ``2399'', 9 medals are paid out and the advantageous period is forcibly ended. In the above case, a configuration may be adopted in which the counter for displaying the number of sheets is incremented to the number "2408" (=2399+9) and the number "2408" is displayed as the final number of acquired sheets.

In this embodiment, a configuration is assumed in which the instruction period (for example, EDBB state) can be forcibly terminated with the end of the advantageous section. In the above configuration, the number of medals until the end of the advantageous section (the number of medals until the MY counter reaches the numerical value "2400") may be displayed immediately before the end of the advantageous section (instruction period). The above configuration has the advantage that even if the MY counter and the counter for displaying the number of medals do not match, the number of medals until the MY counter reaches the numerical value "2400" can be grasped.

Furthermore, in the above configuration, a configuration may be adopted in which a message indicating that the advantageous section is about to end is displayed. As a specific example of the above configuration, a configuration may be considered in which, in a game after the MY counter has been added to a value of ``2350'' or more, a message ``The advantageous period ends with XX coins remaining'' is displayed. Furthermore, in the above specific example, when the MY counter reaches the threshold value "2400" and the advantageous section ends, a message to that effect (for example, ``The number of coupons acquired in the advantageous section has exceeded 2400.The advantageous section has ended. The configuration may also be configured to display a message such as "This message is displayed."

<Each process executed by the main CPU>
The main CPU 301 executes various processes using the above-mentioned data. The main CPU 301 executes startup processing when a reset signal from the reset circuit is input. The reset signal is output when the power supply voltage supplied to the main control board 300 exceeds a predetermined threshold. For example, when power supply voltage is started to be supplied to the main control board 300 by turning on the power switch 511SW, a startup process is executed. In the startup process, the main CPU 301 initializes each register of the main control board 300.

In addition, in the startup process, the main CPU 301 executes various processes (processing for transitioning to a playable state) including processing for changing setting values. Note that the main CPU 301 may execute a security check process to determine the validity of the control program stored in the main ROM 302 before the startup process. After finishing the startup process, the main CPU 301 shifts to the game control process. In this embodiment, when the set value is changed, the gaming state shifts to a non-internal medium state, and the ball output state becomes a non-advantageous section. Furthermore, a storage area including a specific counter (see FIG. 22(a)) is initialized.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the game control process of the main CPU 301. The game control process is executed each time a player plays one game. Although described in detail later, the main CPU 301 executes interrupt processing at predetermined time intervals (for example, 1.49 ms) during the period in which the game control processing is executed. That is, the main CPU 301 alternately executes the game control process and the interrupt process. For example, the command sent to the sub-control board 400 is set in the game control process, and is sent to the sub-control board 400 in the interrupt process. Commands indicating various lottery results executed by the main CPU 301 or numerical values of various counters provided in the main RAM 303 are transmitted to the sub control board 400 as appropriate. Further, each timer (for example, a wait timer) set in the game control process is subtracted in the interrupt process.

When the main CPU 301 starts the game control process, it executes the initial setting process (S101). The initial setting process is executed every time one game is completed. In the initial setting process, the main CPU 301 initializes a storage area of the main RAM 303 that is initialized for each game. For example, the winning area storage area in which the winning area (winning area number) of the previous game is stored is initialized in the initial setting process.

After the initial setting process, the main CPU 301 moves to automatic input process (S102). Through the automatic insertion process, when the symbol combinations related to the replay are aligned on the active line as a result of the previous game, the main CPU 301 sets the same number of bet medals as the previous game as the bet medals for the current game.

After the automatic insertion process, the main CPU 301 moves to a game start preprocess (S103). In the game start pre-processing, the main CPU 301 detects medals from the medal insertion section 8 and detects the operation of the payment button 23. In the game start pre-processing, when the insertion of medals is detected, the main CPU 301 adds bet medals or credits. Further, in the game start pre-processing, when an operation of the settlement button 23 is detected, the main CPU 301 refunds the bet medals or credits. Further, the main CPU 301 detects the operation of the start lever 24 (ie, the game start operation) in the game start pre-processing.

When the main CPU 301 detects a game start operation in the game start pre-processing, the main CPU 301 moves to a setting value confirmation process (S104). In the setting value confirmation process, the main CPU 301 determines whether the setting value is appropriate. Specifically, in the setting value confirmation process, the main CPU 301 determines whether the setting value is within the range of the numerical value "1" to the numerical value "6". If the main CPU 301 determines that the set value is not within the range of the numerical value "1" to the numerical value "6", the main CPU 301 stores a set value abnormality command indicating an abnormality in the set value in the command storage area, and proceeds to set value error processing. .

When the main CPU 301 determines that the set value is appropriate in the set value confirmation process, it acquires the random number value R1, the random number value R2, and the random number value R3 (S105). The random number R1 is a hardware random number generated by the random number generator 304, and is used in the internal lottery process. The random number R2 is a software random number obtained from a register built into the main CPU 301, and is used in the spinning performance determination process and the like. The random value R3 is used in processing related to the instruction function. The main CPU 301 stores the obtained random number value R1 in the random number value R1 storage area of the main RAM 303. Similarly, the main CPU 301 stores the acquired random number R2 in the random number R2 storage area of the main RAM 303 and stores the random number R3 in the random number R3 storage area of the main RAM 303.

After storing the random number R1, the random number R2, and the random number R3 in the main RAM 303, the main CPU 301 shifts to the start process (S106). The processing at the start includes an internal lottery process to determine the winning area using the random number value R1, a BB determination process to determine the transition to the BB state, and a spinning drum performance to determine the spinning drum performance using the random number value R2. It consists of various processes including production decision processing. Further, the start time process includes an instruction number determination process for determining an instruction number.

After executing the start time process, the main CPU 301 executes the spinning drum effect process (S107). For example, in the spinning performance process, a process of accepting various game operations and switching the mode of the reels 12 (acceleration, variable display, stop, standstill, vibration) is executed. In addition, the main CPU 301 sets the above-mentioned delay time by lottery in the spinning performance process. Note that the remaining time of the wait period is also subtracted in the spinning performance process.

The main CPU 301 executes the wait process (S108) after executing the spinning drum effect process. The wait process is a process for making the time length of each game longer than a predetermined length. In the wait process, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the wait period has elapsed, and if it is determined that the wait period has not elapsed, the main CPU 301 does not proceed from the wait process to the pre-stop process described below.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the wait period has elapsed, the main CPU 301 moves to pre-stop processing (S109). In the pre-stop process, various data (such as priority order, which will be described later) is stored in the main RAM 303 according to the winning area determined in the internal lottery process. In the stop control process to be described later, each reel 12 is stopped according to each data stored in the pre-stop process, so that symbol combinations related to the winning combination specified in the winning area are stopped and displayed on the active line.

After the main CPU 301 executes the pre-stop processing, the main CPU 301 proceeds to the stop control process (S110). Through the stop control process, the main CPU 301 stops the reel 12 corresponding to each stop button 25 each time the stop button 25 is operated. Each reel 12 stops at a symbol position according to each data set in the above-mentioned pre-stop processing.

When all the reels 12 are stopped in the stop control process, the main CPU 301 shifts to display determination process (S111). In the display determination process, the main CPU 301 determines the combination of symbols displayed on the active line. Further, the main CPU 301 sets various data according to the type of symbol combination displayed on the active line. For example, if it is determined that the symbol combination related to the replay is stopped and displayed on the active line, the main CPU 301 sets the replay operation flag to the ON state. Further, when the main CPU 301 determines that the symbol combination related to the winning winning combination on the active line has stopped, it adds the number of medals according to the type of the winning winning combination to the number of credits.

After executing the display determination process, the main CPU 301 executes the stop process (S112). In the stop processing, the main CPU 301 shifts the ball output state and the game state. The above stoppage process includes the above-described determination condition lottery process and stock lottery process. Further, in the stop processing, the main CPU 301 starts or ends an advantageous section as the ball output state changes. Specifically, advantageous section control processing, which will be described later, is executed. When the main CPU 301 completes the stop processing, the main CPU 301 returns the processing to step S101.

FIG. 27 is a flowchart of advantageous section control processing. The main CPU 301 executes advantageous section control processing in the above-mentioned stop processing. Note that the advantageous section control process is executed in all games regardless of the game state. When starting the advantageous section control process, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the current game is in the advantageous section (Sx0). If it is determined that the vehicle is not in an advantageous section (Sx0: No), that is, in a non-advantageous section, the main CPU 301 ends the advantageous section control process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is in an advantageous period (Sx0: Yes), the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the replay is stopped and displayed on the active line in the current game (Sx1).

If it is determined that the replay is not stopped and displayed (Sx1: No), the main CPU 301 executes MY counter update processing (Sx2). In the MY counter update process, the MY counter is updated. Specifically, a value obtained by subtracting the number of bet medals (3 medals) from the number of medals paid out in the current game is added to the MY counter. For example, if the number of coins to be paid out is 9, the numerical value "6" is added to the MY counter. Further, when the number of coins to be paid out is 0, the numerical value "3" is subtracted from the MY counter. In the replay (the next game after the game in which the replay is stopped and displayed), step Sx2 is executed with the number of automatically inserted medals as the number of bet medals in the game. After executing the MY counter update process, the main CPU 301 advances the process to step Sx3. If it is determined that the replay is stopped and displayed in the current game (Sx1: Yes), the main CPU 301 skips the MY counter updating process and advances the process to step Sx3.

In step Sx3, the main CPU 301 determines whether the MY counter is larger than the numerical value "2400". When determining that the MY counter is larger than the numerical value "2400" (Sx3: Yes), the main CPU 301 initializes all parameters related to the instruction function stored in the main RAM 303 (Sx5), and ends the advantageous section control process. . In step Sx5, for example, the above-mentioned specific counter is initialized, and the ball output state shifts to a non-advantageous section. Note that even if the ball payout state shifts to a non-advantageous section, the gaming state does not change.

When determining that the MY counter is not larger than the numerical value "2400" (Sx3: No), the main CPU 301 determines whether the advantageous section counter has been subtracted to the numerical value "0" (Sx4). Note that the advantageous section counter is decremented by a numerical value of "1" in the above-mentioned start processing. If the main CPU 301 determines that the advantageous section counter has a value of "0" (Sx4: Yes), the main CPU 301 executes step Sx5 described above and ends the advantageous section control process. Note that a case where "Yes" is determined in step Sx5 (when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated) is assumed to be a case where the advantageous section counter is decremented to the value "0" in the EDBB state. In this embodiment, except for the above case, the advantageous section is configured to end before the advantageous section counter is decremented to the numerical value "0".

If it is determined that the advantageous section counter is not the numerical value "0" (Sx4: No), the main CPU 301 determines whether the MY counter is smaller than the numerical value "0" (whether it is a negative number or not) (Sx6). . If the MY counter is a negative number (Sx6: Yes), the main CPU 301 sets the MY counter to the numerical value "0" (Sx7) and ends the advantageous section control process. On the other hand, if the MY counter is greater than or equal to the numerical value "0" (Sx6: No), step Sx7 is omitted and the advantageous section control process is ended.

<Each process executed by the sub CPU>
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the sub activation process of the sub CPU 412. The sub CPU 412 executes sub activation processing when a reset signal from the reset circuit is input. The reset circuit outputs a reset signal when the power supply voltage supplied to the sub-control board 400 exceeds a predetermined threshold. For example, when the supply of power supply voltage to the sub control board 400 is started, the sub startup process is executed.

When the sub CPU 412 starts the sub boot process, the sub CPU 412 executes the boot initialization process (S301). In the startup initialization process, the sub CPU 412 initializes various registers of the sub control board 400, for example.

In the startup initialization process, the sub CPU 412 determines whether there is a backup abnormality in the sub RAM 414. If there is a backup abnormality, the sub CPU 412 initializes the backup data. Further, the sub CPU 412 determines whether data stored in various ROMs including the CGROM 424 is appropriate in the startup initialization process. For example, data stored in a specific address of each ROM is read and it is determined whether the data is appropriate. If an abnormality is found in various ROMs, the sub CPU 412 shifts to predetermined error processing.

In the sub-starting process, the sub CPU 412 starts the lamp control task (S302), starts the sound control task (S303), starts the image control board communication task (S304), starts the main control board communication task (S305), and performs the production. The button input task is activated (S306).

The sub CPU 412 controls various lamps including the housing lamp 5 and the performance lamp 28 by a lamp control task. Further, the sub CPU 412 controls the speakers (31, 32) by an audio control task. Further, the sub CPU 412 sends a command to the image control board 420 in the image control board communication task, receives a command from the main control board 300 in the main control board communication task, and presses the direction of the production button 26 in the production button input task. The operation of the designation button 27 is accepted.

A timer interrupt signal is input to the sub CPU 412 at predetermined time intervals. Upon receiving the timer interrupt signal, the sub CPU 412 executes one of the tasks. That is, each peripheral device including various lamps and speakers (31, 32) is controlled in a time-sharing manner.

By the way, the total number of medals acquired in a predetermined number of games is required to be within a predetermined range, no matter which setting value is set. Specifically, the total number of medals acquired in 400 games is required to be more than one third and less than 2.2 times the total number of inserted medals. Further, the total number of medals acquired in 1,600 games is required to be more than two-fifths of the total number of inserted medals and less than 1.5 times. Further, the total number of medals acquired in 6,000 games is required to be more than half of the total number of inserted medals and less than 1.26 times. Further, the total number of medals acquired in 17,500 games is required to be more than three-fifths of the total number of inserted medals and less than 1.15 times.

Whether or not the above criteria (hereinafter referred to as "ball output criteria") are met is usually confirmed through a test. If the number of medals tends to decrease excessively in a predetermined number of games, there is a high possibility that the ball output standard will not be met in the test. Furthermore, if an excessively large number of medals are likely to be obtained in a predetermined number of games, there is a high possibility that the ball output standard will not be met in the test. In other words, the higher the gambling nature of a gaming machine, the higher the possibility that it will be determined that the ball output standard is not satisfied in the test.

In consideration of the above circumstances, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment adopts a configuration in which the gambling nature is significantly lower at a specific set value than at other set values. Specifically, we created a configuration in which when the setting value ``1'' is set among each setting value, the possibility of meeting the ball release standard in the test is significantly higher than when other setting values are set. Adopted. For example, in this embodiment, many medals can be acquired by transitioning to the instruction period (BB state). When the setting value is set to "1", the probability of transitioning to the instruction period (first hit probability) is relatively high, but the instruction period tends to end in a short period of time (difficult to repeat). According to the above configuration, when the set value "1" is set, the probability that the ball release criterion is satisfied in the test increases.

However, when the setting value is set to "1", the gambling quality is significantly lowered, and many players feel that the game lacks fun. Therefore, in a configuration in which it is not possible to determine whether or not the set value "1" is set before playing the game, some players may be inconvenienced in avoiding playing the game with the gaming machine 1. In consideration of the above circumstances, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which it is possible to determine whether or not the setting value "1" is set before playing the game. The above configuration will be explained in detail below.

FIG. 29A is a flowchart of the power-on processing performed by the sub CPU 412. Immediately after the power is turned on, the sub CPU 412 executes a power-on process. Further, the above power-on processing is normally completed before the main CPU 301 becomes able to execute the game control processing. That is, the sub CPU 412 completes the power-on processing before the game becomes possible.

When the power-on process is started, the sub CPU 412 checks the setting values set on the main CPU 301 side. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sends a command indicating the set value to the sub CPU 412 immediately after the power is turned on. The sub CPU 412 checks the setting value indicated by the command in step Sy1. Thereafter, the sub CPU 412 determines whether the setting value confirmed in step Sy1 is "1" (Sy2).

If it is determined that the set value is not "1" (Sy2: No), the sub CPU 412 determines the normal control mode (Sy3) and ends the power-on process. On the other hand, when determining that the set value is "1" (Sy2: Yes), the sub CPU 412 determines the special control mode (Sy4) and ends the power-on process. As will be explained in detail below, the mode of the production execution means (stop button 25, speaker, liquid crystal display device 30) is different between when the normal control mode is determined and when the special control mode is determined. .

FIG. 29(b) is a diagram for explaining the aspect of the effect execution means in each control mode. As shown in FIG. 29(b), in the normal control mode, the stop button 25 emits red light during a period when the operation of the stop button 25 is invalid (for example, a period when the corresponding reel is stopped). On the other hand, in the special control mode, the stop button 25 emits green light during a period in which the operation of the stop button 25 is invalid.

In the above configuration, by checking the color of the stop button 25, the player can identify whether or not the setting value "1" has been set before playing the game. However, as shown in FIG. 29(b), the color of the stop button 25 during the period in which the stop operation is possible is blue in common in each control mode. Assume a configuration in which the color of the stop button 25 during the period in which the stop operation is possible is different in each control mode. With the above configuration, there is a conceivable problem that it becomes difficult for some players to intuitively judge whether or not the stop operation is valid. According to this embodiment, the above disadvantages are suppressed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the player can adjust the master volume by operating the direction designation button 27. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 29(b), when the control mode is the normal control mode, the player can adjust the master volume. On the other hand, in the special control mode, the master volume cannot be changed. According to the above configuration, when the master volume cannot be changed, the player can specify that the setting value "1" is set. However, in any control mode, the error sound for notifying an error is output at the maximum volume.

As described above, in this embodiment, the player can change the production mode (enjoy mode, normal mode, simple mode) by operating the direction designation button 27. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 29(b), when the control mode is the normal control mode, the player can change the production mode. On the other hand, in the case of special control mode, the production mode cannot be changed. According to the above configuration, when the production mode cannot be changed, the player can specify that the setting value "1" is set.

In this embodiment, as soon as the sub CPU 412 recovers from a power-off state, the power-on process is executed, and the stop button 25 is displayed in green. According to the above configuration, for example, when the stop button 25 is displayed in green, the administrator of the gaming machine 1 that has turned on the power can immediately understand that the setting value "1" has been set. It has the advantage of being possible.

Note that the image on the liquid crystal display device 30 during the non-gaming period may be different between the normal control mode and the special control mode. With the above configuration, as in the present embodiment, it is possible to identify whether or not the setting value "1" is set before playing the game. However, the time from when the power is turned on until it is restored is usually shorter for lamps (including the stop button lamp) than for the liquid crystal display device 30. Therefore, in this embodiment, compared to a configuration in which only the image of the liquid crystal display device 30 changes in each control mode, for example, it becomes possible to identify that the set value "1" is set after the power is turned on. This has the advantage of shortening the time required.

30(a) to (c) are flowcharts of the effect control processing by the sub CPU 412. The performance control process is a process for controlling the performance in the performance execution means (liquid crystal display device 30, etc.). As shown in FIGS. 30(a) to (c), the production control process includes a sub-start process, a sub-first stop process, and a sub-stop process. FIGS. 30(a) to 30(c) show an excerpt of the production control process.

FIG. 30(a) is a flowchart of sub-start processing. When a game start operation is performed, the main CPU 301 transmits a command indicating this to the sub CPU 412 (sub control board 400). When the sub CPU 412 receives the command from the main CPU 301, the sub CPU 412 executes sub start processing. As shown in FIG. 30(a), when the sub start time process is started, the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not the sub penalty state is in progress (Sy11). For example, if the stop operation was performed in an irregular press order in the previous game during the non-instruction period, the sub-penalty state will occur when the sub-start processing in the current game is executed.

If it is determined that the sub-penalty state is not present (Sy11: No), the sub CPU 412 determines various performances through a performance lottery (Sy12), and ends the sub-start processing. When the performance is determined in step Sy12, the execution of the performance is started in each performance execution means. On the other hand, if it is determined that the sub-penalty state is in effect (Sy11: Yes), the sub CPU 412 skips the performance lottery and ends the sub start time process. According to the above configuration, in a game started during a sub-penalty state, a new performance is not determined in step Sy12.

FIG. 30(b) is a flowchart of the sub-first stop process. When the first stop operation is performed, the main CPU 301 transmits a command indicating the stop button 25 (left, middle, right) on which the first stop operation was performed to the sub CPU 412 . When the sub CPU 412 receives the command from the main CPU 301 during the non-instruction period, the sub CPU 412 executes the sub first stop process. As shown in FIG. 30(b), when the sub first stop process is started, the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not the left first stop operation has been performed (Sy21). If it is determined that the left first stop operation has been performed (Sy21: Yes), the sub CPU 412 ends the sub first stop process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a stop operation has been performed other than the first left stop (middle first stop, right first stop) (Sy21: No), the sub CPU 412 forcibly ends the currently running production (Sy22). . For example, the performance that was started in the immediately preceding sub-start time process is forcibly ended in the sub-first stop process when a middle first stop operation or a right first stop operation is performed thereafter.

Note that when a stop operation is performed other than the first left stop, instead of a configuration in which all performances are forced to end uniformly, a configuration may be adopted in which some performances can continue to be executed. For example, when a stop operation other than the first left stop is performed, the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not the currently executed performance is a specific performance. If it is determined that it is a specific effect, the specific effect is continuously executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the performance is not a specific performance, the performance in progress is forcibly terminated. Note that the above-mentioned specific performance is assumed to be a performance with high expectations (including a case where it is confirmed) that the BB state is won. Further, as the specific performance, a performance for notifying the transition of the game state (for example, a performance when the BB state starts) is assumed. It is preferable that the specific performance described above is started in the game even if the game scheduled to start is in a sub-penalty state.

As shown in FIG. 30(b), when the sub CPU 412 determines that a stop operation other than the first left stop has been performed, the sub CPU 412 shifts to the sub penalty state (Sy23). Further, when the sub CPU 412 determines that a stop operation other than the first left stop has been performed, the sub CPU 412 executes the notification content determination process (Sy24). In the notification content determination process, notification images (GM1 in Figure 24 (c-1), GM2 in Figure 24 (c-2)) and notification voices (voice ``You are pressing from inside'', voice ``You are pressing from the right'') ) is determined. Specifically, when the first stop operation in the middle is performed in the current game, the notification image GM1 and the notification sound "You are pressing from the inside" are determined. Furthermore, when the right first stop operation is performed in the current game, the notification image GM2 and the notification sound "Pushing from the right" are determined. Once the notification image is determined, the notification image is immediately displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. Further, once the notification sound is determined, the notification sound is immediately output from the speaker.

Steps Sy22 to Sy24 described above are executed even if the middle first stop operation is performed or the right first stop operation is performed in the current game. As can be understood from the above explanation, the expected acquisition value A is different between the case where the center first stop operation is performed and the case where the right first stop operation is performed, but the same effect processing (steps Sy22 to Step Sy24) is performed. executed. Note that in this embodiment, steps Sy22 to Sy24 are exemplified as the "similar effect processing" of the present invention, but other effect processing may be adopted. For example, as the "similar effect processing", effect processing in which Step Sy22 and/or Step Sy23 from Step Sy22 to Step Sy24 are omitted may be employed.

FIG. 30(c) is a flowchart of the sub-stop processing. When the last stop button 25 is operated, the main CPU 301 transmits a command indicating this to the sub CPU 412. When the sub CPU 412 receives the command from the main CPU 301, the sub CPU 412 executes the sub stop process. As shown in FIG. 30(c), when the sub-stop processing is started, the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not the left first stop operation has been performed in the current game (Sy31). If it is determined that the left first stop operation has been performed (Sy31: Yes), the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not the sub penalty state is in progress (S32).

If it is determined that the sub-penalty state is not in progress (Sy32: No), the sub-CPU 412 ends the sub-stop processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the sub-penalty state is in effect (Sy32: Yes), the sub CPU 412 cancels the penalty state (Sy33) and ends the sub-stop processing. According to the above configuration, the sub-penalty state is canceled at the end of the game in which the left first stop operation is performed. Further, in step Sy31 described above, if it is determined that the left first stop operation has not been performed (Sy31: No), the sub CPU 412 omits step Sy33 and ends the sub stop processing. According to the above configuration, if no game is played on the left 1st, the sub-penalty state continues in the next and subsequent games.

<Modified example>
Each of the above forms can be modified in various ways. Specific modes of modification are illustrated below. Two or more aspects arbitrarily selected from the examples below may be combined as appropriate.

(1) In each of the above-described embodiments, the expected acquisition value A is made different depending on the stop operation order of the unfavorable pressing order (left middle right, left right middle). However, a configuration may be adopted in which the expected acquisition value A is common for each stop operation order of the disadvantageous pressing order. For example, a configuration is conceivable in which the expected acquisition value A is common for each stop operation order in an unfavorable press order, and the expected acquisition value A may be different for each stop operation order in an advantageous press order. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the expected acquisition value A is made different between each stop operation order of the advantageous push order (middle 1st, right 1st). However, a configuration may be adopted in which the expected acquisition value A is common to each stop operation order of the advantageous press order. For example, a configuration is conceivable in which the expected acquisition value A is common for each stop operation order in an advantageous press order, and the expected acquisition value A may be different for each stop operation order in an unfavorable press order.

In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the expected acquisition value A is common between the "middle left and right" and the "middle right and left" of the middle 1st, but they may be different. Moreover, although the configuration is such that the expected acquisition value A is common between "right left middle" and "right middle left" in the right 1st, they may be configured to be different. Specifically, the expected acquisition value A may be different for all the stop operation orders among the stop operation orders in the irregular press order. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the expected acquisition value A of only one stop operation order among the stop operation orders in the irregular press order is different.

(2) In each of the above embodiments, the configuration for generating the difference value (X, Y) can be changed as appropriate. FIGS. 31(a) and 31(b) are diagrams for explaining a modification having a configuration for generating a difference value (X, Y).

As shown in FIG. 31(a), there are five effective lines in this modification: an upper line, a middle line, a lower line, an up-right line, and a down-right line. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 31(b), each reel is provided with 20 pieces, and the left reel 12L has a symbol position "7", the middle reel 12C has a symbol position "7", and the right reel 12R has a symbol position "7". A watermelon symbol is placed on each of the reels (one watermelon symbol is placed on each reel). Furthermore, this modified example includes a watermelon combination (the symbol combination is "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon") as a winning combination. In addition, the role of watermelon will be won individually.

In this modified example, at the first left stop of a game in which the watermelon winning combination is won, "pull-in control to stop the watermelon symbol on the upper or lower row of the left reel 12L" is executed, and at the middle first stop, "the watermelon symbol is stopped at the upper or lower row of the middle reel 12C". A "draw-in control for drawing the watermelon pattern to the lower row" is executed. In the above modified example, when the watermelon symbol is the first stop on the left in a winning game, the symbol position "12" 5 frames before the watermelon symbol is located on the middle line (unit area UL2), and then the watermelon symbol is on the upper row. The retraction range of the watermelon symbol is seven frames from when the watermelon symbol becomes retractable until the symbol position "6" one frame behind the watermelon symbol is located on the middle line (unit area UL2). Therefore, when the stop operation position is random, the watermelon symbol on the left reel 12L is stopped and displayed on the upper line or the lower line with a probability of 7/20.

Assume that a watermelon symbol is stopped and displayed on the lower line at the first stop on the left. In the above case, at the middle second stop, after the symbol position "11", which is four frames before the watermelon symbol, is located on the middle row line (after the watermelon symbol can be retracted to the middle row), the symbol position "11", which is four frames before the watermelon symbol, is located on the middle line (after the watermelon symbol can be retracted to the middle row), and then the symbol position "11", which is one frame behind the watermelon symbol, is The six frames until the symbol position "6" is located on the middle line are the drawing range of the watermelon symbol. Therefore, if the stop operation position is random, the watermelon symbol on the middle reel 12C will be stopped and displayed on the middle line or the lower line with a probability of 6/20. In other words, the watermelon winning symbol combination has a probability of 6/20. Similarly, when the watermelon symbol is stopped and displayed on the upper line at the first stop on the left, the symbol combination of the watermelon combination will be tenpai with a probability of 6/20.

Assume that a watermelon symbol appears on the lower line at the first left stop and the second middle stop. In the above case, at the third stop on the right, the symbol position "10" three frames before the watermelon symbol is located on the middle row line (after the watermelon symbol can be retracted to the lower row), and then the symbol position "10" one frame behind the watermelon symbol is located on the middle line (after the watermelon symbol can be retracted to the lower row) The five frames until the symbol position "6" is located on the middle line are the drawing range of the watermelon symbol. Therefore, if the stop operation position is random, the watermelon symbol on the right reel 12R will be stopped and displayed on the lower line with a probability of 5/20. That is, when the watermelon symbol is full on the lower line and the stop operation position is random, the watermelon combination will win with a probability of 5/20. Note that the probability of winning a watermelon combination at the third stop when performing a stop operation with "left center right" is the same regardless of the line where the watermelon symbol is tenpai.

In the above modified example, if you perform a stop operation with "left center right" in a game where the watermelon winning combination is won, the probability of attracting the watermelon winning combination is 210/8000 (= (7/20) x (6/20) x (5/ 20)). On the other hand, although a detailed explanation will be omitted, if you perform a stop operation with "middle left/right" in a game where the watermelon winning combination is won, the probability of attracting the watermelon winning combination is 175/8000 (= (7/20) x (5/20) x (5/20)). As understood from the above explanation, the watermelon combination is a winning combination that produces a difference value (X, Y). That is, in this modification, the difference value becomes larger than the numerical value "0".

(3) In each embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which either or both of the difference value XJ and the difference value XH is a numerical value "0". That is, in the present invention, the configuration in which "the difference in expected acquisition value is less than a predetermined value" includes a configuration in which the difference in expected acquisition value A (difference value X) is a numerical value of "0". .

(4) In each embodiment, the performance related to the instruction function of the instruction display 16 may be configured to change depending on the gaming state. For example, in the bonus operating state of the first embodiment described above, the BB lottery does not win unless the judgment condition Dh "5" is selected (see FIG. 18(b)), and the instruction function performance has decreased. On the other hand, the internal medium state and the non-internal medium state have the same performance related to the instruction function (excluding processing when moving to an advantageous section). Instead of the above configuration, a configuration may be adopted in which the performance related to the instruction function changes between the internal medium state and the non-internal medium state. For example, in the non-internal medium state, the performance related to the instruction function may be lowered compared to the internal medium state (for example, it becomes difficult to win the BB lottery). Further, in the internal state, the performance related to the instruction function may be lowered compared to the non-internal state. The performance related to the instruction function may be configured to decrease in the order of internal medium state, non-internal medium state, and bonus activation state.

However, in a configuration in which the performance related to the instruction function changes depending on the gaming state, there may be an inconvenience that the player is likely to cancel the game if the performance related to the instruction function changes to a gaming state where the performance related to the instruction function decreases. In consideration of the above circumstances, it is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the performance of the instruction function changes depending on the gaming state, in which the current gaming state is difficult to grasp.

For example, in the first embodiment, a notification image can be displayed, a notification audio can be played, and a transition to a sub-penalty state can be made in common between the bonus operation state where the performance related to the instruction function is relatively low and the other game states. I made it. According to the above configuration, for example, in the bonus operation state, the notification image is not displayed, the notification audio is not played, and the transition to the sub-penalty state is not performed. There is an advantage that the current gaming state is difficult to grasp from the aspect. In addition to the above configuration, the effects that can be executed in each game state may be made common, or the aspects of each effect execution means in the default state may be made common.

(5) In each form, the types of gaming states are not limited to the above-mentioned examples. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of types of RBB combinations are provided and the gaming state changes depending on the type of RBB combinations carried over. For example, if there are two types of RBB roles, RBB role 1 and RBB role 2, if RBB role 1 is carried over, it will move to internal medium state 1, and if RBB role 2 is carried over, it will move to internal medium state 2. It is also possible to have a configuration in which Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the performance related to the instruction function changes between the internal intermediate state 1 and the internal intermediate state 2. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the BB lottery and/or the processing at the time of transition to an advantageous section are more advantageous in the internal medium state 2 than in the internal medium state 1.

In the above modification, a configuration (for example, the first embodiment) in which the game progresses in principle in the internal medium state is assumed. In the above configuration, the subsequent advantage changes depending on which internal medium state (1, 2) the non-internal medium state is transitioned to immediately after the set value is changed. Specifically, once the vehicle enters the internal medium state, the internal medium state is maintained over the period after the start of the advantageous section, the transition to the non-advantageous section, and the start of the advantageous section again. Therefore, according to the modified example, if a transition is made to the relatively advantageous internal medium state 2, compared to a case where the transition is made to the internal medium state 1, which is more disadvantageous than the internal medium state 2, subsequent advantageous sections The player becomes advantageous over the (non-advantageous section).

According to the above modification, since an advantageous state may be maintained over a plurality of advantageous sections (non-advantageous sections), there is an advantage that the game can be easily continued even if the advantageous section ends. In addition, in the above modification, a configuration may be adopted in which an effect in which the type of internal state is suggested (notified) can be executed. According to the above configuration, the advantage that the game can be easily continued even if the advantageous period ends becomes particularly noticeable.

However, suppose a configuration in which the symbol stop control is different depending on the type of internal medium state (including a game in which the RBB combination is won) is assumed. In the above configuration, there is a possibility that the type of internal state can be ascertained from the stop control. Therefore, there may be an inconvenience that the game is immediately recognized as having shifted to a relatively disadvantageous internal state and the game is stopped. In consideration of the above circumstances, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the stop control is common regardless of the type of internal medium state (including games in which the RBB combination is won). Further, it is preferable that the type of winning area and the winning probability of the winning area are substantially the same regardless of the type of internal medium state. Similarly, it is preferable that the transitionable ball-out state be the same regardless of the type of internal medium state. However, the replay winning probability may be configured to change slightly in each internal state. In the above configuration, it is preferable that the advantageous section is not started when the replay is won.

As a specific example of the above modification, a configuration may be considered in which multiple types of RTs with different replay winning probabilities are provided. In the above configuration, once the internal medium state is entered, the RT is not changed unless the state is entered into the bonus operation state. For example, assume a configuration in which the state becomes RT0 in the non-internal state and the internal state 1, and the state shifts to RT1 in the internal state 2. In the above configuration, a more advantageous BB lottery is executed in RT1 than in RT0. Note that a configuration may be adopted in which a more advantageous BB lottery is executed in RT2 than in RT1.

(6) In each form, a gaming state in which there is no stop operation order in which the expected acquisition value A is unilaterally advantageous (a gaming state in which the difference between the expected acquisition values A is less than a predetermined value Nx, hereinafter referred to as "the expected acquisition value A is The bonus operating state is illustrated as a "flat gaming state"). However, the gaming state in which the expected acquisition value A is flat is not limited to the above example. For example, in the internal medium state, a stopping operation order is provided in which the expected acquisition value A is unilaterally advantageous, while in the non-internal medium state, the expected acquisition value A may be flat.

Specifically, as mentioned above, batting order plums are batting order plums (such as plums CL (1 to 4) that can win prizes in both the internal medium state and the non-internal medium state; hereinafter collectively referred to as "unchanged plums"). (Figure 10(a) reference). If the winning probabilities of the plums in the batting order are the same, the expected acquisition value A in the non-internal medium state can be adjusted by changing the winning ratio of the fixed plums and the variable plums.

For example, when the proportion of variable plums is increased (when the proportion of unchanged plums is decreased), the expected value A obtained in the non-internal medium state becomes smaller. In the above configuration, the winning ratio between the fixed plum and the variable plum should be set so that the expected acquisition value A of the non-internal medium state becomes flat. Note that in the above configuration, when a stop operation is performed in an advantageous press order in the internal state, penalty control may be executed in the non-internal state, or penalty control may not be executed.

In addition, in a configuration in which a unilaterally advantageous stop operation order is provided in the internal medium state, and the expected acquisition value A is flat in the non-internal medium state, the difference value X (XJ>0 or (and) XH>0) A common configuration may be used for the internal medium state and the non-internal medium state. For example, similarly to the first embodiment, in the internal medium state, the expected acquisition value A1 (center left, right) is "1.5683961", the expected acquisition value A2 (center left, right) is approximately "1.5684143", and the expected acquisition value Assume a configuration in which A3 and expected acquisition value A4 (middle 1st) are approximately "2.7669029", and expected acquisition value A5 and expected acquisition value A6 (right 1st) are approximately "2.7681847". In addition, in the above configuration, in the non-internal medium state, the expected acquisition value A1 (left center right) is approximately "1.5683961", the expected acquisition value A2 (left right center) is approximately "1.5684143", and the expected acquisition value A3 Assume a modified example in which the expected acquisition value A4 (middle 1st) is approximately "1.5684153" and the expected acquisition value A5 and the expected acquisition value A6 (right 1st) are approximately "1.5696971".

In the above modification, while the irregular press order is unilaterally advantageous in the internal medium state, the expected acquisition value A becomes flat in the non-internal medium state. Furthermore, in this modification, the magnitude relationship of each expected value A is "A1<A2<A3=A4<A5=A6" in both the internal medium state and the non-internal medium state. Further, in common between the internal medium state and the non-internal medium state, the difference value XJ is approximately "0.0000182", and the difference value XH is approximately "0.0012818". Assume a configuration in which the magnitude relationship of each expected acquisition value A changes between the internal medium state and the non-internal medium state (the advantages are reversed). With the above configuration, a problem may arise in that a stop operation order in which the expected acquisition value A has a relatively low advantage is easily mistaken as a stop operation order in which the advantage is high. The above-mentioned modification has the advantage that the above-mentioned disadvantages are suppressed.

(7) In each form, the content of penalty control can be changed as appropriate. For example, assume a configuration in which the result of the BB lottery is suggested by a pseudo game. In the above configuration, a configuration may be adopted in which when the penalty control is executed, the pseudo game is not executed.

(8) In each embodiment, the order of stop operations in which penalty control is executed can be changed as appropriate. For example, in the first embodiment, penalty control is executed in all advantageous pressing orders. Instead of the above configuration, a configuration may be adopted in which penalty control is executed in some of the advantageous press orders, and penalty control is not executed in other advantageous press orders.

(9) In each form, some of the batting order plums (CL (5, 6), CR (5, 6), RL (1 , 2), RC(1, 2), and RC3) are different in stop control, but the above configuration can be changed as appropriate. For example, all stop controls for batting order plums whose correct press order is an irregular press order may be configured to be different between the internal medium state and the non-internal medium state. Specifically, in the non-internal medium state, even if any of the batting order plums whose correct pressing order is an irregular pressing order wins, the correct plum does not win a prize regardless of the stop operation order, and a 1-card winning combination wins. (In the left 1st, a 1-card winning combination has a probability of 25%, and in the irregular press order, a 1-card winning combination has a probability of 100%).

However, if a configuration is adopted in which only one card can win even if any of the batting order plums whose correct pressing order is an irregular pressing order is won, the expected acquisition value A in the middle 1st in the non-internal middle state (3, 4) is approximately "1.1189537", and the expected acquisition value A (5, 6) at the right 1st is approximately "1.1202354". That is, in this modified example, in the non-internal state, the expected acquisition value A of the left 1st (see FIG. 12(b)) is greater than the expected acquisition value A of the irregular press order.

Specifically, in the above modification, in the non-internal state, the expected acquisition value A of the left 1st is greater than the expected acquisition value A of the irregular press order by a specific value Ny (0.1) or more. The above configuration can also be said to change (reverse) the advantageous press order (unilaterally advantageous press order) between the internal medium state and the non-internal medium state. Therefore, depending on the player, there may be an inconvenience in that it is easy for some players to misidentify the advantageous push order. As described above, according to the first embodiment, in some batting order plums where the correct press order is an irregular press order, the correct plum can win even in the non-internal medium state, so the internal medium state and the non-internal medium state The advantageous pressing order is the same for both (see FIGS. 12(a) and 12(b)). Therefore, there is an advantage that the above-mentioned disadvantages are suppressed.

In addition, the stop control of all the batting order plums including the batting order plum whose correct press order is left 1st may be changed between the internal medium state and the non-internal medium state. Specifically, in the non-internal medium state, a configuration may be adopted in which, regardless of the order of the stopping operations, a one-card winning combination may be won without the correct plum winning, regardless of the winning order of the plums in the batting order.

By the way, since penalty control is executed if the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order, the player generally performs the stop operation at the left first position. Therefore, in a configuration in which the correct answer plum does not win when the batting order plum whose correct answer press is left 1st wins in the non-internal medium state (for example, the above-mentioned modified example), the correct answer plum does not win and the batting order plum wins in the non-internal medium state. There are circumstances in which this can be understood.

Furthermore, as described above, if the set value is changed in the internal mode, the state shifts to the non-internal mode, and if the set value is not changed, the internal mode is maintained. Therefore, in a configuration in which the correct answer plum does not win when the batting order plum whose correct answer press order is left 1st wins in a non-internal medium state, it is possible to tell whether or not the setting value has been changed because the correct answer plum does not win. This may cause some inconvenience. In the first embodiment, the stop control at the time of left 1st shift is the same in the internal medium state and the non-internal medium state. Therefore, there is an advantage that the above-mentioned disadvantages are suppressed.

(10) In the first embodiment described above, the original (intended) gameplay is realized by the game progressing in the internal medium state. However, depending on the player, when the RBB combination is won in the non-internal medium state, there are cases where the symbol combination of the RBB combination is stopped and the game does not shift to the internal medium state. In consideration of the above circumstances, it is preferable to adopt a configuration that promotes transition to the internal medium state.

As the above configuration, for example, a configuration can be considered in which the expected value A obtained in all stop operation orders including the left 1st is uniformly larger in the internal medium state than in the non-internal medium state. Specifically, a "special plum" will be set up as a winning area. The above special plums are won with a predetermined probability in the internal medium state and the non-internal medium state. Furthermore, if a special plum is won in the internal medium state, a 6-plum combination is won regardless of the stop operation mode (order, position). On the other hand, if a special plum is won in the non-internal state, a one-card winning combination is won regardless of the stop operation mode.

According to the special plum, the expected acquisition value A is greater by a predetermined number in the internal medium state than in the non-internal medium state, regardless of the order of the stop operations. Therefore, transition to the internal medium state is encouraged. In addition, if a special plum is won in the non-internal medium state, a 6-card plum combination will be won regardless of the stop operation mode, and if a special plum is won in the internal medium state, a 1-card winning combination will be won regardless of the stop operation mode. may be adopted. According to the above configuration, there is an advantage that the disadvantage that the internal medium state is excessively advantageous over the non-internal medium state is suppressed. Further, in the above configuration, it is preferable that the advantageous section is not started in the special plum winning game in each game state including the internal medium state. According to the above configuration, the advantage that the inconvenience that the internal medium state is excessively advantageous over the non-internal medium state is suppressed becomes particularly remarkable.

(11) In the first embodiment described above, a configuration is adopted in which the difference value X (J, H) does not change between the internal medium state and the non-internal medium state. However, a configuration may be adopted in which the difference value X (J, H) changes between the internal medium state and the non-internal medium state. The above configuration has the advantage that the winning probability of each winning area and the degree of freedom of stop control when the winning area is won are improved. However, in a configuration where the difference value X (J, H) changes between the internal medium state and the non-internal medium state, the relative advantage of each stop operation order (for example, the pressing order of left 1st) changes. . Therefore, some players may be confused about the order in which they should perform the stop operations. The configuration of the first embodiment has the advantage that the above-mentioned disadvantages are suppressed.

(12) In the first embodiment described above, the reach target 6 and the reach target 7 are provided as winning areas that generate the difference value X. Further, in the first embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the first command of the reach character is not grouped. Instead of the above configuration, a configuration may be adopted in which the first commands of the batting order plum and the reach position (including the reach position 6 and the reach position 7) are grouped. That is, a configuration may be adopted in which it is not possible to determine from the first command whether or not the winning area that produces the difference value X has been won. In the above configuration, each command may be transmitted to the sub-control board 400 at the time of the start operation during the non-instruction period.

(13) In the above-described first embodiment, when the above-described variable plum (Plum CL (5, 6), etc.) is won in a non-internal state, the second command indicating "no instruction" (B99) is controlled as the main control. It was sent from the board 300 to the sub control board 400. Further, if the variable plum is won in a non-internal state, the instruction by the instruction display 16 is not executed.

However, if a variable plum is won in a non-internal state, there is a possibility that you will miss out on one card if you stop with the left 1st, but if you stop with an irregular pressing order (including the correct pressing order of variable plums), you will always A winning combination of one card wins (see FIG. 10(a)). That is, if the variable plum is won in the non-internal medium state, the irregular pressing order will be more advantageous than the left 1st. Considering the above circumstances, if a variable plum is won in the non-internal medium state, the correct pressing order (any of the irregular pressing orders) in the internal medium state will be determined in the same way as when a variable plum is won in the internal medium state. A configuration may also be adopted in which a second command shown in FIG. In addition, when a variable plum is won in the non-internal medium state, the correct pressing order in the internal medium state is indicated on the instruction display 16 (instruction performance is not executed), similar to when a variable plum is won in the internal medium state. ) configuration.

(14) In each embodiment, the notification image and notification sound are exemplified as a configuration that notifies the stop operation in an irregular press order in a manner that does not constitute a warning. However, the configuration for notifying that the stop operation has been performed in an irregular press order is not limited to the above example. For example, instead of the configuration that notifies the message ``You are pressing from the middle (right)'', it may be configured to notify you of the message ``You are pressing irregularly.'' Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which a message saying "Press left is recommended" is notified.

FIG. 32(a) is a simulated diagram of the notification image GM3 in a modified example. In this modified example, when the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order during the non-instruction period (commonly for the middle 1st and right 1st), the notification image GM3 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. For example, the notification image GM3 is displayed at the first stop, and thereafter is displayed until the third stop. However, the timing at which the notification image GM3 is displayed may be changed as appropriate. For example, the notification image GM3 may be displayed for a predetermined period of time from the third stop. Further, the notification image GM3 may be configured to continue being displayed over a plurality of games. Similar to the notification image GM (1, 2) of the first embodiment, the notification image GM3 of the modification is not displayed when the vehicle stops first on the left.

As shown in FIG. 32(a), the notification image GM3 indicates that if the game is played with the first left stop, the transition to the BB state is more likely to be determined, while the expected value A of medal acquisition in each game is reduced. In addition, the notification image GM3 displays that if the game is played in an irregular pressing order, it becomes difficult to determine the transition to the BB state, and the expected value A of medal acquisition in each game increases. According to the above-mentioned notification image GM3, it becomes easy for the player to recognize that the gameplay changes depending on whether the game is played with the first left stop or the irregular press order. Further, by displaying the notification image GM3 immediately after the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order, there is an advantage that the player can easily notice that the stop operation has been performed in an irregular press order.

FIG. 32(b) is a diagram for explaining another modification. In this modification, the control executed by the sub CPU 412 is changed depending on whether the stop operation is performed with the first left stop or the stop operation is performed with an irregular press order. However, the control executed by the sub CPU 412 is common between the irregular press orders (middle 1st and right 1st).

Specifically, in this modification, each backlight corresponding to each reel 25 is provided, similar to the first embodiment described above. Further, at the time of the third stop (when medals are paid out), a backlight effect may be performed. When the backlight effect is executed, each backlight blinks or goes out in a predetermined manner. On the other hand, during a game period in which no backlight effect is performed, the backlight is turned on. In the above configuration, when a stop operation is performed in an irregular press order during a game during a non-instruction period, all backlights are turned off at the third stop. Specifically, the backlight is completely turned off at the end of the game in which the stop operation was performed in an irregular pressing order, regardless of whether or not it has been decided to execute the backlight effect.

As shown in FIG. 32(b), in this modified example, the stop sound of each reel 12 changes depending on whether the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order during the non-instruction period or when the stop operation is performed at the first left stop. . Specifically, when the stop operation is performed at the left first stop, a normal stop sound is generally output when each reel 12 (L, C, R) stops. On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed in an irregular pressing order, a special stop sound is output when each reel 12 (L, C, R) stops.

The above-mentioned special stop sound can be used as a normal stop sound instead of a warning sound. In addition, in the above specific example, the special stop sound is output at the first to third stops, but the special stop sound is output only at the first stop, and the normal stop sound is output at the second and third stops. A configuration may also be adopted in which a stop sound is output. Furthermore, in the above configuration, the stop sound may not be output during the second stop and the third stop. Furthermore, if the stop operations are performed in an irregular press order, the stop sound may not be output during the first to third stops.

As shown in FIG. 32(b), in this modified example, each image displayed by the liquid crystal display device 30 when the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order during the non-instruction period and when the stop operation is performed at the first left stop. The color changes. Specifically, when a stop operation is performed at the first left stop, each image does not darken. On the other hand, if the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order, each image becomes dark. Note that the timing for darkening each image may be at the first stop or at the third stop. Moreover, the timing to restore each darkened image to the original state is considered to be at the third stop if the darkened image was darkened during the first stop. Further, each image that has been darkened may be returned to its original state at the timing when a bet medal is inserted to start the next game, or at the timing when an operation to start the next game is performed.

As shown in FIG. 32(b), in this modified example, the presence or absence of the medal payout sound changes depending on whether the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order during the non-instruction period or when the stop operation is performed at the first left stop. . Specifically, when a winning combination is won in a game in which a stop operation is performed with the first left stop, a payout sound corresponding to the winning combination (number of coins to be paid out) is output. On the other hand, when a winning combination is won in a game in which the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order, a payout sound corresponding to the winning combination is not output. Note that the dispensing sound may be configured to change depending on whether the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order or when the stop operation is performed at the first left stop (the dispensing sound itself is output in each case).

In the above modification, some of the controls that completely turn off the backlight, change the stop sound, darken the LCD display 30, and omit the payout sound are executed when the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order. You can.

FIG. 32(c-1) and FIG. 32(c-1) are diagrams for explaining still another modification. As will be described in detail later, even in this modified example, the player can be urged to play the game at the first left stop without issuing a warning.

FIG. 32(c-1) is a diagram for explaining the stop effect. FIG. 32(c-1) is a simulation diagram of each image displayed in the stop effect. For the sake of explanation below, when the screen of the liquid crystal display device 30 is divided into three equal parts in the horizontal direction, the left area when viewed from the front will be referred to as the left area ML, the central area will be referred to as the middle area MC, and the right side will be referred to as the left area ML. The area will be referred to as right area MR. In other words, the above left region ML corresponds to the left stop button 25L, the middle region ML corresponds to the middle stop button 25C, and the right region MR corresponds to the right stop button 25R. In this modification, when a game start operation is performed (before a stop operation), it is determined whether or not to perform a stop performance in the game.

The specific example in FIG. 32(c-1) assumes a game in which a stop effect is executed, and immediately after the first stop operation is executed. As shown in FIG. 32(c-1), when the first stop operation is executed in a game in which a stop effect is executed, a stop image GX is displayed in the left area ML. In the above stop effect, when the stop operation is performed at the first left stop, the stop image GX is displayed in the left area ML corresponding to (located near) the left stop button 25L, so the stop image This has the advantage of making it easier to draw attention to GX.

FIG. 32(c-2) is a diagram for explaining the area where the stop image GX is displayed in the stop effect. As described above, when the stop operation is performed at the left first stop, the stop image GX is displayed in the left area ML. In addition, even if the stop operation is performed at the middle first stop, the stop image GX is displayed in the left area ML, and even if the stop operation is performed at the right first stop, the stop image GX is displayed in the left area ML. Image GX is displayed.

In the above configuration, when the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order, the stop image GX is not displayed in the area (MC, MR) corresponding to the stop button 25 on which the first stop operation was performed, and the stop image GX is displayed in the left area ML. GX is displayed. Therefore, the player can be made to feel that the display area of the stop image GX when the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order is unnatural, and the player is encouraged to play the game with the first stop on the left.

(15) In each embodiment, the notification image and notification sound that notify that the stop operation has been performed in an irregular press order may be changed as appropriate. Further, a plurality of types of notification images may be provided. For example, different notification images may be provided for each production mode. Similarly, different notification sounds may be provided for each production mode. However, in each production mode, the notification image may have a common configuration. Similarly, the notification sound may be configured to be common in each production mode.

(16) In each embodiment, multiple types of normal states may be provided. For example, three types of normal states, normal state A, normal state B, and normal state C, may be provided. Furthermore, in each of the above normal states, the ease of winning the BB state may be changed. As the above configuration, for example, a configuration can be considered in which the normal state A, the normal state B, and the normal state C are easily shifted to the high probability period in this order.

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the normal state shifts to another normal state at a specific opportunity. For example, in a game in which a specific winning area is won, mode transition lottery processing is executed in the stop processing. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the normal state is shifted upon winning in the mode shift lottery process described above. Furthermore, a configuration in which the normal state A transitions to the normal state B or the normal state C, but does not transition from the normal state B or the normal state C to the normal state A is suitable. Similarly, a configuration in which the normal state B transitions to the normal state C, but does not transition from the normal state C to the normal state B is preferable. In this modification, when a stop operation is performed in an irregular press order in a game in which a specific winning area is won, the above-described mode transition lottery process may be omitted. Furthermore, if the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order, the probability of winning in the mode transition lottery process may be changed to a low probability.

(17) In each form, in a game in which a specific group won, a second command "B99" was sent as a "command whose correct answer mode cannot be specified" during the non-instruction period. In addition, in a game in which a specific group won, second commands "B01" to "B06" corresponding to the instruction numbers (01 to 06) were transmitted as "commands that can identify the correct answer mode" during the instruction period. However, the "command for which the correct mode cannot be specified" and the "command for which the correct mode can be specified" are not limited to the above examples.

For example, in a game in which a specific group wins, the first command "A04" is transmitted as a "command whose correct answer mode cannot be specified", and the type of batting order plum (Plum L, Plum L, A first command (for example, A04-1 to A04-6) specifying Plum LC, Plum LR, Plum CL, Plum CR, Plum RL, Plum RC may be transmitted. With the above configuration, the correct mode can be identified from the first command in the non-instruction period. However, in the above configuration, the second command may be transmitted as in the first embodiment.

(18) In each embodiment, the configuration for notifying a specific setting value (setting value "1") can be changed as appropriate. For example, assume a configuration in which when a non-gaming period continues for a predetermined time, a period in which a demo screen is displayed (hereinafter referred to as "demonstration period") starts. In the above configuration, the period in which the demo screen is displayed in the special control mode (control mode in which the setting value "1" is set) and the normal control mode (control mode in which the setting value other than "1" is set) is It is also possible to have a configuration in which the aspect of the effect execution means is different during the "demonstration period" hereinafter.

For example, during the demonstration period, a configuration may be considered in which the waist panel 6 (internal lamp) is turned on in the normal control mode, and the waist panel 6 is turned off in the special mode. Even in the above configuration, the player can grasp whether or not the setting value "1" has been set before playing the game. Further, in the above configuration, it is preferable that the demo period starts immediately after the setting value is changed (immediately after the setting change mode ends).

(19) In each embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the main penalty control is not executed when the irregular press order is executed in the non-advantageous section, but a configuration may be adopted in which the main penalty control can be executed. As the above configuration, for example, a configuration may be considered in which main penalty control is executed in which processing at the time of transition to an advantageous section becomes disadvantageous.

(20) In the first embodiment, if the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order during the non-instruction period (excluding non-advantageous sections), the main penalty control is executed regardless of the type of winning area. However, in a game in which a specific winning area is won, the main penalty control may not be executed. For example, in a game in which cherry (1, 2), bell, reach hand (1 to 7), or replay (2, 3) (hereinafter collectively referred to as "rare hand") is won, the main penalty control is not executed. Good too. For example, in a game in which a rare combination is won, even if the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order, the determination condition lottery process may be executed and the specific counter may be updated. Furthermore, if a rare combination is won in a game in which a transition to the BB state has been determined, the stock lottery process may be executed even if the stop operation is performed in an irregular pressing order.

In addition, in a game in which a specific winning area (for example, a rare combination) is won, a part of the main penalty control may not be executed. For example, in a game in which a rare combination is won, the determination condition lottery process is executed, but the specific counter update process may be omitted.

(21) In the first embodiment, in a game where the ceiling counter reaches the numerical value "0", a configuration is adopted in which the stock preferential treatment flag is in the ON state. However, in a configuration in which the ceiling counter is decremented even when the stop operations are performed in an irregular press order, the stop operation order of the game in which the ceiling counter reaches the numerical value "0" may be in an irregular press order. In the above case, when the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order in a game in which the ceiling counter reaches the numerical value "0", the stock lottery process may be executed with the stock preferential treatment flag in the OFF state.

(22) In each embodiment, the stock lottery process may be configured to be executed even in the BB state where the stock preferential treatment flag is OFF. For example, assume a configuration in which a premier BB state is provided as the BB state. In the above-described premium BB state, BB stock is awarded with a higher probability in the stock lottery process of each game compared to the BB state. In the above configuration, when the stock preferential treatment flag is in the OFF state, the stock lottery process is not executed during the BB state, but the stock lottery process may be exceptionally executed during the premium BB state.

However, in the above modification, it is preferable to have a configuration in which some kind of penalty is given when the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order in a winning game in the premium BB state. For example, assume a configuration in which when 1G consecutive stock is provided in the premium BB state, the game shifts to the BB state following the premium BB state (the BB state plays one consecutive game). In the above configuration, if the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order in a winning game in the premier BB state, it is preferable that the stock lottery process is not executed in each game in the BB state in which one game is played consecutively.

Note that in the above configuration, the stock lottery process may not be executed in the BB state until all the 1G consecutive stocks granted in the premium BB state are used up. In addition, the stock lottery process is not executed in some BB states (for example, the first BB state) in which one game is played consecutively, and the stock lottery process is executed in other BB states (second and subsequent BB states). Good too.

(23) In each embodiment, the main penalty control can be changed as appropriate. For example, in the first embodiment described above, if the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order in the current game, the probability of winning the BB state in the next game becomes low. Instead of the above configuration, if the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order in the current game, the probability of winning the BB state in the game may be lowered. Further, in the first embodiment, the update process of the ceiling counter is omitted by the main penalty control, but a configuration may be adopted in which the ceiling counter is incremented by the main penalty control.

Further, assume a configuration in which a lottery (BB lottery) to determine whether to transition to the BB state is executed in the start time processing. In the above configuration, if a stop operation is performed in an irregular press order in the current game, the result of the BB lottery in the game may be rewritten. For example, assume a game in which the BB state is won in the BB lottery in the start process. Further, assume that the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order in the game. In the above case, for example, a configuration may be considered in which the result of the BB state is rewritten to "miss" in the stop processing. Furthermore, main penalty control that invalidates the result of the BB state may be adopted in the stop processing.

Further, in a configuration in which a BB lottery is executed in the start process and the result of the BB lottery is invalidated in the stop process, immediately after executing the BB lottery, a command indicating the result of the BB lottery is sent to the sub CPU 412. A configuration may also be used. With the above configuration, although it may become invalid depending on the order of the subsequent stop operations, it becomes possible to perform an effect of notifying the results of the BB lottery early (for example, approximately at the same time as the start operation).

In a configuration in which a BB lottery is executed in the start process and the result of the BB lottery is invalidated in the stop process, when a stop operation is performed at the first left stop, an effect is executed to notify the result of the BB lottery. It is also possible to have a configuration in which With the above configuration, when it is substantially determined that the result of the BB lottery will not be invalidated, the player can be informed of the result of the BB lottery.

In the main penalty control of the first embodiment described above, the updating process of specific counters (ceiling counters, etc.) other than the high security certificate counter in the game where the stop operation was performed in an irregular press order was omitted. Instead of the above configuration, when the process at the start of the game executes the update process for the specific counter, and when the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order in the game, the process at the time of stop changes the specific counter to the value immediately before the update process. It is also possible to have a configuration in which it is returned.

In the first embodiment described above, when the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order, both the determination condition lottery process and the high probability transition lottery process are omitted. Instead of the above configuration, a configuration may be adopted in which only one of the lottery selections can be omitted.

(24) In each embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which sub-penalty control is executed when a stop operation is performed in an irregular press order in a non-advantageous section. Specifically, when the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order in a non-advantageous section, the main penalty control may not be executed, but the sub-penalty control may be executed, and the performance being executed may be stopped.

(25) In each embodiment, the content of sub-penalty control may be changed as appropriate. For example, assume a configuration in which a plurality of types of performance stages are provided in a specific ball release state (for example, normal state) during a non-instruction period. For example, the location (background image) where the character GC stays is different in each production stage. As each of the above production stages, there may be a production stage where an image of the character GC staying in a mountain is displayed, and a production stage where an image of the character GC staying in a town is displayed. Each of the above performance stages is switched at, for example, random timing. Further, when the production stage is switched, a switching image is displayed on the entire screen.

In the above configuration, when sub-penalty control is executed, a configuration may be adopted in which a specific production stage (hereinafter referred to as "default stage") is forcibly switched. In addition, if a configuration includes a production stage that is easy to stay in during a high probability period (hereinafter referred to as a "high probability suggestion stage") and a production stage that is easy to stay in during a low probability period (hereinafter referred to as a "low probability suggestion stage"), Preferably, the stage is adopted as the default stage. Further, when switching to the default stage by sub-penalty control, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the switching image is not intentionally displayed.

(26) In each embodiment, at the time of the first stop (first middle stop, first right stop), the effect image was switched to the default image at approximately the same time as the notification image was displayed. However, the timing at which the notification image is displayed and the timing at which the effect image is switched to the default image may be configured to be different. For example, instead of the above configuration, a notification image may be displayed at the first stop, then a performance image may be displayed until the third stop, and the default image may be displayed upon the third stop operation. good.

(27) In each form, a configuration may be adopted in which the symbol combinations displayed in the pseudo game (spinning performance) change depending on the presence or absence of the main penalty control. For example, in a pseudo game when the BB state or EDBB state is started, any of the symbol combinations "Red Seven - Red Seven - Red Seven", "Gold Seven - Gold Seven - Gold Seven", or "BAR-BAR-BAR" Assume a configuration where is displayed. When the EDBB state is started, "BAR-BAR-BAR" is displayed in the pseudo game. Also, when the BB state starts, either "Red Seven - Red Seven - Red Seven" or "Gold Seven - Gold Seven - Gold Seven" is determined by lottery, and the determined symbol combination is a pseudo game. Displayed in .

In the above configuration, a configuration may be considered in which a symbol combination to be displayed in the pseudo game is drawn by lottery according to the number of BB stocks when the BB state is started. Specifically, the larger the number of BB stocks, the easier it is to determine "gold seven - gold seven - gold seven." As described above, when the main penalty control is executed, the stock lottery process becomes disadvantageous. Therefore, when the main penalty control is executed, "red seven-red seven-red seven" is more likely to be determined at the start of the BB state.

However, a configuration may be adopted in which the presence or absence of main penalty control does not affect the symbol combinations displayed in the pseudo game. As the above configuration, for example, a configuration may be considered in which the symbol combination displayed in the pseudo game is determined regardless of the number of BB stocks at the start of the BB state. In addition, similar to the above-mentioned modification, a premier BB state is provided, and if the premier BB state is won, a predetermined dedicated pseudo game (spinning performance) is executed regardless of the presence or absence of main penalty control. It may also be a configuration.

(28) In each form, a period is provided in which the main penalty control is not executed even if the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order during the non-instruction period (the period in which the instruction by the instruction display 16 is not executed) during the advantageous section. It's okay. For example, a chance state in which a transition to the BB state is easily determined may be provided, and the main penalty control may not be executed in this chance state. In the above configuration, the main penalty control may not be executed only in a specific game in a chance state. Further, in the non-internal state, the main penalty control may not be executed. Similarly, the main penalty control may not be executed in the bonus operating state.

(29) In each of the above forms, for example, in the non-internal medium state, cherry 1 in the winning area wins with a probability of "X/65536", and duplicate combination 2 (cherry 1) wins with a probability of "Y/65536". (X, Y are positive integers). Furthermore, in the above configuration, in the internal medium state, Cherry 1 wins with a probability of "(X+Y)/65536". Further, in the bonus activation state, Cherry 1 wins with a probability of "X/65536". In the above configuration, in the non-internal medium state, if Cherry 1 is won or if Duplicate combination 2 is won, an advantageous section is started. Further, in the bonus operating state, if Cherry 1 is won, an advantageous section is started. However, if Cherry 1 is won in the internal medium state (the gaming state in which the player generally stays), the advantageous section will not start.

In the above configuration, the processing at the time of transition to an advantageous area when Cherry 1 is won may be configured to be more advantageous than when another winning area (hereinafter referred to as a "disadvantageous winning area") is won. For example, in the advantageous section transition process when Cherry 1 is won, a configuration may be adopted in which transition to the BB state is always determined. In the above configuration, for example, when the BB state shifts to the bonus operating state, the advantageous section ends in the bonus operating state, and then, when Cherry 1 is won during the bonus operating state and the advantageous section starts, The first ball state in the advantageous section becomes the BB state.

However, by stopping and displaying the RBB combination, it is possible to shift to the bonus operating state at any time. Therefore, if an advantageous section is likely to end in a bonus operating state (a new advantageous section is likely to start in a bonus operating state), a problem may arise in which the player becomes excessively advantageous. In consideration of the above circumstances, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the advantageous section ends in the bonus operating state only when a predetermined opportunity is established. For example, a configuration in which the main CPU 301 executes a predetermined lottery, the advantageous period ends in the bonus activation state after winning in the lottery, and the advantageous period does not end in the bonus activation state to which the main CPU 301 transitions when the lottery does not win. is possible.

(30) In each of the above embodiments, in a game in which a specific winning area (hereinafter referred to as a "transfer winning area") is won in a non-advantageous area, processing at the time of moving to an advantageous area is executed, and a special lottery is performed according to the type of the transfer winning area. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the presence or absence of . Furthermore, it may be configured such that it is possible to ascertain (or estimate) whether or not the transition winning area has been won, depending on the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed. For example, a configuration is conceivable in which a specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed only in games where the transition winning area is won. Furthermore, a configuration is conceivable in which a specific symbol combination is likely to be stopped and displayed in a game where the transition winning area is won.

(31) In the first embodiment, in the start process, the fall lottery in the pullback state, the high probability fall lottery, and the subtraction of the high security certificate counter were executed. In addition, in the stop processing, a ceiling counter subtraction, a determination condition lottery process, a stock lottery process, and a high probability transition lottery were executed. That is, among the processes related to the instruction function, processes that put the player at a disadvantage were executed in the start process, and processes that gave the player an advantage were executed in the stop process. In addition, each process that gives the player an advantage during the stop process becomes disadvantageous (or is omitted) due to the main penalty control, while each process that puts the player at a disadvantage during the start process does not apply to the main penalty control. The structure is such that it cannot be omitted. However, processing that is disadvantageous due to main penalty control may be included in the start processing. Further, when the main penalty control is executed, a part of each process that puts the player at a disadvantage may be omitted.

(32) In each embodiment, the order of stop operations in which main penalty control is executed may be changed as appropriate. For example, in the non-instruction period, the main penalty control may be executed in the first right stop among the irregular press orders, and the main penalty control may not be executed in other stop operation orders (including the middle first stop).

(33) In each embodiment, a unilaterally advantageous stopping operation order is provided in both the non-internal state and the internal state. However, a configuration may also be adopted in which a unilaterally advantageous stop operation order is provided for only one of the non-internal state and the internal state, but not for the other. As the above configuration, in the first embodiment, a configuration in which the expected medal acquisition value is the same regardless of the order of stop operations in the non-internal state can be considered. In addition, in the above configuration, the main penalty control is not executed when the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order in the non-internal state, and the main penalty control is executed when the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order in the internal state. You can also use it as

(34) In each embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the normal state is basically a high probability period. For example, a configuration can be considered in which a high probability counter is provided and when the high probability counter has a value of "1" or more, the period becomes a high probability period. In the above configuration, in the start process, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the BB state (hereinafter referred to as "winning lottery"). In the above winning lottery, it is easier to win in the high probability period than in the low probability period. In addition, in this modified example, in each game, the value "1" is subtracted from the high probability counter immediately after the winning lottery, regardless of the winning area of the game, and the value "1" is added to the high probability counter in the processing at the time of stopping. is added. Therefore, the high probability counter at the start of each game is in principle ``1''. That is, each game basically becomes a high probability period. However, in games where the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order, the high accuracy counter will not be added. Therefore, if the stop operation is performed in an irregular press order, the low probability period will start from the next game. In each game in the low probability period, the high probability counter is incremented by 1 with a probability of approximately 1/10. That is, once the transition to the low probability period occurs, the low probability period continues for about 10 games on average.

(35) In each form, due to main penalty control, each process (judgment condition lottery process, etc.) in which the winning area is not referenced becomes disadvantageous (low probability, omitted), but the winning area is referenced. A configuration may be adopted in which each process is disadvantageous. For example, it may be configured such that whether or not to shift to the BB state in the game is determined by lottery with a probability depending on the winning area of the current game. However, in the above configuration, it is preferable that in a game in which the lottery is executed, the stop operation order in which the main penalty control is not executed is notified. For example, even in a game where the common bell 1 is won in which the bell combination is won regardless of the stop operation order, if the aforementioned lottery is disadvantageous due to an irregular press order, the instruction display 16 is configured to instruct the left first stop. is suitable.

(36) In each embodiment, it is possible to shift to the bonus operating state in the advantageous section, but the ceiling counter may not be updated in the bonus operating state. In the above configuration, it is preferable that the number of games image GE (see FIG. 24(a) described above) is not updated before and after the bonus activation state. Furthermore, in the above configuration, the number-of-games image GE may be hidden during the bonus activation state.

(37) In each embodiment, if the batting order plum whose correct pressing order is left 1st is won in a non-instruction period, the instruction display 16 may indicate the incorrect pressing order. Further, if the stop operation is performed in an incorrectly instructed press order, the main penalty control is not executed, but if the stop operation is performed in an uninstructed press order, the main penalty control is executed. In addition, in the instruction period, the correct pressing order of the batting order plums is instructed.

(38) The present invention can be applied not only to the above-mentioned pachi-slot machine, but also to pachinko machines, other game machines, and game machines in general. It goes without saying that the control in each of the above modifications can be executed regardless of the gaming state.

The gaming machine of the present invention is, for example, the following gaming machine.

The gaming machine of the present invention includes a game control means for controlling the progress of the game in either an advantageous section or a non-advantageous section, a performance control means for controlling each performance according to a command from the game control means, and a performance control means for controlling each performance in accordance with a command from the game control means. , a symbol display means (each reel 12) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols and stop displaying symbol combinations as a result of a game , and a first order (left 1st) and a second order (different from the first order). A gaming machine equipped with a stop operation means (each stop button 25) capable of performing a stop operation in an irregular press order, and an instruction means (instruction display 16) capable of executing an instruction of an advantageous order of stop operations, The game control means includes a winning area determining means that determines one of the plurality of winning areas, and a symbol fluctuation control means (stopping) that stops and displays the symbol combinations according to the winning area, the timing of the stopping operation, and the order of the stopping operation. (control processing), a gaming value imparting means (display determination processing) that makes it possible to impart a number of gaming values corresponding to the symbol combination, and a gaming state transition that causes the transition to each gaming state including the first gaming state and the second gaming state. means (processing at the time of stop); a ball release state control means capable of controlling any of the ball release states including the ball release state in which the instruction is executed on the condition that the instruction is executed in the advantageous section ; , a penalty control means capable of making it more difficult to determine a transition to a ball dispensing state in which an instruction is executed when a stop operation is performed in a second order, compared to a case where a stop operation is performed in a first order; In the first game state, the expected value of the game value (A1 to A6) that is given when the stop operation is performed at random timing is higher than when the stop operation is performed in the first order. When the stop operation is performed, the number of stop operations is more than a specific value (Ny "0.1"), the first order includes multiple types of stop operation orders, and in the first gaming state, each stop operation order of the first order is mutually The difference between the expected acquisition values becomes less than a predetermined value (predetermined value N x "0.01"), and the second order includes multiple types of stop operation orders, and in the first gaming state, the second order The difference between the expected values obtained in each stop operation order is less than a predetermined value , the specific value is 10 times or more of the predetermined value, and the expected value obtained in the first gaming state is determined regardless of the order of stop operations. number or less, and in the non-advantageous section of the first gaming state, if a specific winning area is won among the plurality of winning areas, it is possible to shift to a relatively advantageous ball playing state among each ball playing state, If a specific winning area is won in the non-advantageous section of the second gaming state, the game does not shift to the advantageous ball-dispensing state .

1... Gaming machine, 300... Main control board, 301... Main CPU, 302... Main ROM, 303... Main RAM, 304... Random number generator, 305... I/F circuit, 400... Sub control board, 410... Performance control board , 411... I/F circuit, 412... Sub CPU, 413... Sub ROM, 414... Sub RAM, 420... Image control board, 421... Image control CPU, 422... Image control ROM, 423... VDP, 424... CGROM, 425 ...RAM, 430...sound board, 431...sound source IC, 432...sound source ROM.

Claims (1)

A game control means for controlling the progress of the game in either the advantageous section or the non-advantageous section;
Production control means for controlling each production according to commands from the game control means;
a symbol display means capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols in each game and stop displaying a symbol combination as a result of the game ;
a stop operation means capable of performing a stop operation in a first order and a second order different from the first order ;
A gaming machine comprising an instruction means capable of instructing an advantageous stop operation order,
The game control means is
a game start means that enables a game to be started using a prescribed number of game values;
Winning area determining means for determining one of a plurality of types of winning areas;
symbol variation control means for stopping and displaying the symbol combination according to the winning area, the timing of the stop operation, and the order of the stop operation;
a gaming value imparting means capable of imparting a number of gaming values corresponding to the symbol combination;
A game state transition means for transitioning to each game state including a first game state and a second game state ;
Ball release state control means capable of controlling any of the ball release states including the ball release state in which the instruction is executed on the condition that the instruction is in the advantageous section ;
In the first gaming state, when a stop operation is performed in the second order, it is difficult to determine the transition to the ball dispensing state in which the instruction is executed, compared to when the stop operation is performed in the first order. and a penalty control means capable of
In the first gaming state, the expected value of the game value to be acquired when the stop operation is performed at random timing is higher than when the stop operation is performed in the second order, compared to when the stop operation is performed in the first order. more than a certain value ,
The first order includes multiple types of stop operation orders,
In the first gaming state, the difference in the expected acquisition value becomes less than a predetermined value between each stop operation order in the first order,
The second order includes a plurality of types of stop operation orders,
In the first gaming state, the difference in the expected acquisition value becomes less than the predetermined value between each stop operation order in the second order,
The specific value is 10 times or more the predetermined value,
The expected acquisition value in the first gaming state is equal to or less than the specified number regardless of the order of stop operations,
In the non-advantageous section of the first gaming state, if a specific winning area out of the plurality of winning areas wins, the game shifts to a relatively advantageous ball playing state among the ball playing states, while the second If the specific winning area is won in the non-advantageous section of the gaming state, the game will not shift to the advantageous ball-out state.
Game machine.

Images